JP2019058836A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing dynamic display time of one identification information while enhancing interest in a game without causing a player to get tired.SOLUTION: When false variation performed during one variation display is executed for five times (in the case of "five" false variation times), a "role" where it is determined that a special ready-to-win results and a jackpot results, and a "role" where it is determined that a ready-to-win does not result and complete losing results are at least granted. When the number of false variation times is five, it is configured that a degree of expectation toward a jackpot is the highest in the case where the ready-to-win is satisfied. Thus, a player can increase a degree of expectation toward satisfaction of a ready-to-win and a jackpot by repetition of false variation in a process reaching complete losing even if the complete losing results through five pseudo variations. Thus, interest in a game is enhanced without causing the player to get tired, and false continuation is allowed to occur frequently, thus increasing one average variation time.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, various effects images such as fluctuation effects (dynamic display of identification information) are displayed on display means such as liquid crystal display devices to improve the interest of the game. The fluctuation effect is an effect started when the ball enters the ball entrance (starting opening) (start winning combination), and, for example, three or 3 × 3 grids horizontally or vertically in the effective display area A total of nine symbols etc. are displayed, and the symbols etc. displayed are scrolled based on predetermined game conditions, and when the scroll is stopped, the stop symbols become a predetermined combination at the predetermined stop position. In the case where there is a hit.

JP, 2010-259564, A

  Conventionally, various renditions have been performed in the fluctuating rendition, but it is desirable to further improve the interest in the game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing interest in gaming.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a display means for displaying identification information such as symbols, a main control means for controlling a game, and a control command transmitted from the main control means. A slave control means for causing the display means to perform dynamic display of identification information based on the display means, and displaying a predetermined display result in the dynamic display of the identification information, the special game value being a predetermined game value It is something which grants game state, when the above-mentioned control command receives the above-mentioned control command, it is made to do with the above-mentioned display means out of a plurality of kinds of display modes executed in dynamic display of the above-mentioned identification information. The display mode is a display mode for performing a pseudo stop display a predetermined number of times in the dynamic display of one identification information, the display mode being a selection means for selecting a display mode of the dynamic display of the identification information, The predetermined number of times is different The display modes for displaying the pseudo stop display, including the display modes of the number, are all for performing the pseudo stop display twice or more, and the selection means selects the pseudo stop display. The predetermined stop display is performed after (n + 1) times rather than the case where a part of the predetermined display result is displayed after performing the operation (n is a natural number) and the predetermined effect display is performed. A means for selecting the display mode of the dynamic display of the identification information so that the degree of expectation in which the predetermined display result appears appears higher when a predetermined effect display is performed by displaying a part of the display result And means for selecting a display mode for performing the pseudo stop display (n + 2) times when the display result different from the predetermined display result appears after the pseudo stop display is performed; In the dynamic display of the identification information In the case where the display result is displayed, after performing the pseudo stop display (n + 2) times, the display result different from the display result determined in advance is displayed, and then the display result determined in advance is determined. And means for selecting a display mode for causing a display result to appear, wherein the predetermined effect includes a plurality of effect modes having different times, and the selection means is in a time corresponding to the received control command. And means for determining the number of times of the pseudo stop display to be performed and the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be performed.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the display means is identified based on the display means for displaying identification information such as symbols, the main control means for controlling the game, and the control command transmitted from the main control means. A slave control means for performing dynamic display of information, and providing a special gaming state having a predetermined gaming value when a display result predetermined in dynamic display of the identification information is made to appear And the slave control means, when receiving the control command, dynamically displays the identification information to be performed by the display means among a plurality of types of display modes to be executed in the dynamic display of the identification information. The display mode is a display mode in which pseudo stop display is performed a predetermined number of times in the dynamic display of one identification information, and the display mode includes a plurality of different display modes. Before including display mode The display modes for performing the pseudo stop display are all for performing the pseudo stop display twice or more, and the selection means performed the pseudo stop display n times (n is a natural number) A portion of the predetermined display result is displayed after the pseudo stop display is performed (n + 1) times than when the predetermined effect display is performed by displaying a portion of the predetermined display result later. Means for selecting the display mode of the dynamic display of the identification information so that the degree of expectation that the predetermined display result appears appears higher when the predetermined effect display is performed, and the pseudo stop display Means for selecting a display mode for performing the pseudo stop display (n + 2) times when the display result different from the predetermined display result is produced after performing the step d), and in the dynamic display of the identification information Make the previously mentioned display result appear In this case, after the pseudo stop display is performed (n + 2) times, a display mode which causes a display result different from the predetermined display result to appear once, and then causes the predetermined display result to appear. The predetermined effect includes a plurality of effect modes having different times, and the selecting means performs the pseudo stop to be performed within the time corresponding to the received control command Since the means for determining the number of times of display and the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed is provided, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically area | region division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the jackpot random number table, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the jackpot type table, (c) is a schematic diagram for the jackpot variation pattern table (D) is a schematic view schematically showing the outlier (ordinary) fluctuation pattern table, and (e) is schematically outlier (probable change) fluctuation pattern table It is a schematic diagram shown. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing “roles” given to the number of times of pseudo variation performed during one variation display in the pseudo run according to the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect when the artificial fluctuation is performed three times and finally reaches the reach, (b) is the artificial fluctuation performed four times, the final (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect when entering into the reach, and (c) shows the contents of the effect when the pseudo-variation is performed five times and finally enters into the reach It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the effect when the pseudo-variation is performed five times and it is completely missed in the end. (B) is the fifth time that the pseudo-variation is performed five times It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the contents of an effect in the case where re-variation is performed and a jackpot is decided, after a design is temporarily stopped by disguising by false fluctuation of. (A) is a time chart which shows the normal reach selected in the case of the fluctuation | variation A, (b) is a time chart which shows "5 times pseudo | simulation fluctuation | variation + deviation" selected in the case of the fluctuation | variation F. FIG. (A) is a time chart showing the super reach selected in the case of fluctuation B, (b) is a time chart showing “3 times simulated fluctuation + normal reach” selected in the case of fluctuation B, (C) is a time chart showing "three times simulated fluctuation + super reach" selected in the case of fluctuation B, and (d) is "three times simulated fluctuation + special reach" selected in the case of fluctuation B (E) is a time chart which shows "5 times pseudo fluctuation + revival" selected in the case of fluctuation B. (A) is a time chart showing the special reach selected in the case of change C, and (b) is a time chart showing "four times pseudo change + super reach" selected in the case of change C , (C) is a time chart showing "4 times pseudo fluctuation + special reach" selected in the case of the fluctuation C, and (d) is "5 times pseudo fluctuation + special selected in the case of the fluctuation C It is a time chart which shows "reach." It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view explaining an image at the time of power activation. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface C. FIG. It is the model which showed typically an example of the display data table for fluctuation. It is the model which showed an example of the additional data table typically. It is the model which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the vibration sensor input monitoring process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation indication processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. (A) is a flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the boot processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flow chart showing pending ball number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing decision command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device FIG. 14C is a flowchart showing demo command processing executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing continuous notice command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device It is. (A) is a flowchart showing frame button operation command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing pending image setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device FIG. 14C is a flowchart showing frame button operation processing executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the comparison processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the model which showed an example of the synthetic | combination data table typically. It is the flowchart which showed the demonstration command processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous announcement command processing which is run by MPU inside the display control. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the comparison processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the model which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the flowchart which showed the demonstration command processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous announcement command processing which is run by MPU inside the display control. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the comparison processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to Figs. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, 3 of “town stage,” “empty stage,” and “island stage”. There are two stages. And, various effects such as the fluctuation effect (the transition to perform the fluctuation display (dynamic display) of the third symbol) and the reach effect which are performed along with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) to be described later It is designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the variable effects are not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, "town stage" → "empty stage → → "island stage" → "in the city stage" → ... It changes repeatedly in the following order. Further, immediately after the power is turned on, a "town stage" is set as an initial stage.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. For example, on the periphery of the window portion 14c, electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs are provided. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the right side below the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and the sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) And the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Sensor 51a, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electric resistance (Not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is then driven to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "two-and-a-box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50.

  The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, a windmill and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, a first The ball entrance (starting opening) 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a wood screw from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by etc. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a winning opening etc. is disposed, and a shot ball is (Flowing down area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, at the upper right side upper part (right upper part of FIG. 2) of the game area. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. A plurality of LEDs 37a perform fluctuation display by indicating whether or not they are in the process of being fluctuated along with the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 (start winning), or stop symbols after the end of fluctuation The symbol according to the result of the lottery that is performed for the starting winning combination is shown by the lighting state, or of the balls entered into the first ball entrance 64, of the balls (retention balls) of which the fluctuation has not been executed The number of holding balls, which is a number, is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds in the jackpot and an error display. The LEDs 37a are configured such that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors can indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

  In this pachinko machine 10, in a lottery performed for entering the first ball entrance 64, in addition to making a pass / fail determination of whether or not a big hit, when it is determined to be a big hit, it is also determined the big hit type . As jackpot types to be determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 2R probability variation jackpots, and time-speaking jackpots are prepared. The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change, and if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown.

  Here, “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 round jackpots, and “2R probability variation jackpot” is a maximum number of rounds jackpot of 2 rounds It is a probability change jackpot to shift to a high probability state after. In addition, “time / day / big hit” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots, and for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation times) becomes a time-shortened state.

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state The state of In the high-probability state (in a definite variation) in the present embodiment, the probability of hitting the second symbol (normal symbol) to be described later is increased, and the motorized part (not shown) attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened. By becoming easy, the state of the game in which a ball is easy to enter the first ball entrance 64 is included.

  On the other hand, the "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability is not in a definite state, and means a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability state. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the hitting probability of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) increases with the jackpot probability unchanged. The motorized prize associated with the first ball entry port 64 is more likely to be released, which means a gaming state in which the ball is more likely to enter the first ball entry port 64.

  In addition, according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10, instead of changing the probability of hitting the second symbol, the time when the electric role associated with the first ball entry 64 opens or the hitting in the second symbol The number of times the motorized role opens may be changed. For example, in the low probability state or the high probability state, the open time of the motorized accessory attached to the first entrance 64 may be longer than that in the other gaming states. Further, the time saving state or the high probability state of the low probability state may be a state in which the number of times of opening the motorized combination per one time in the second symbol is larger than that of the other gaming states.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is a liquid crystal display that performs the fluctuation display of the third symbol while synchronizing with the fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 by using the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination) as a trigger. The third symbol display device 81 configured by (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”), and the LED that variably displays the second symbol (ordinary symbol) triggered by the passage of the ball of the second ball entrance 67 The second symbol display device 83 is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIGS. 5 and 12) described later, for example, the left, middle And three right symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. It makes a decorative display according to it. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a view schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten main symbols attached with the numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, and the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is The front of the wooden box is almost fully filled with large numbers. On the other hand, the main symbol with an even number (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached symbol imitating a character such as a furoshiki or helmet, which is almost full on the front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 (refer to FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the third symbol display device 81 changes the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned. And the jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. In the case of shifting to a high probability state (probability state) after the end of the jackpot, variable display is performed in which the main symbols (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) to which odd numbers are added are aligned. On the other hand, when transitioning to the low probability state after the big hit ends, the variable display in which the main symbols (corresponding to the "low probability symbols") to which the even number is added is aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into two vertically, and the lower 2/3 is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, and others The upper 1/3 of the sub-display area Ds is used to display the notice effect, the character, the number of holding balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed on the upper, middle, and lower three stages for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 at each game. Is displayed. A large hit moving image is displayed as a big hit if it is aligned with a combination of big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of holding balls which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which the change has not been executed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2 And Ds3 is an area | region which displays an advance presentation effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the state is more likely to shift to a jackpot than usual. In the central small area Ds2, usually, a predetermined character (a boy with a hachimaki in this embodiment) performs a predetermined movement, sometimes performs a special movement other than the predetermined movement, or another character appears. A notice effect is given by, for example, putting it out.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as one aspect of the fluctuation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 along with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), one fluctuation display Among them, the so-called "pseudo reunion" can be performed in which the pseudo variation of the third symbol is performed a plurality of times consecutively. The "pseudo ream" is a kind of preview effect that suggests an expectation of becoming a big hit as a result of the fluctuation display in which the pseudo ream is executed, and during one fluctuation display, the pseudo stop and re-variation of the third symbol ( The fluctuation effect is performed by an aspect in which the pseudo fluctuation) is repeatedly performed. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 8 to 12, in the “pseudo-link”, the number of times of repetition of pseudo stop and re-variation performed during the one variable display (that is, pseudo-variation is continuously performed The number of repetitions is determined such that the expectation that the jackpot is given after the variable display is increased as the number of times is increased. As a result, the player can feel a sense of increasing the possibility of becoming a big hit if the pseudo fluctuation is repeatedly performed during the display of one fluctuation, so that the fluctuation rendition by the “pseudo series” is performed. Thus, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the game.

  And, when the fluctuation representation by this “pseudo series” is performed, the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used regardless of the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds described above, and the “pseudo series” Display the image of the fluctuation effect. The details of the image of the fluctuation effect by the “pseudo reunion” will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is suspended up to four times The number of holding balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one holding ball number symbol is displayed per one holding ball number ball, and the number of holding balls is displayed according to the display number of the holding ball number symbol. That is, when one holding ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the holding ball number is one ball, and when four holding ball number symbols are displayed, the holding ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number-of-parked-balls design is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of balls-held is 0, that is, there is no ball-held.

  In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entry slot 64 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of balls reserved is not limited to four times, and is three times The number of times may be set to five or more (for example, eight times). In addition, instead of the display of the number-of-hold ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of number-of-hold balls is divided by a number into a part of the third symbol display device 81 or (For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80, the game board 13, or the front frame 12 etc. are provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, for the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state. May be displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 is a variable display that alternately lights a symbol of “o” and a symbol of “x” as a display symbol (second symbol) every time the ball passes through the second entry hole 67. It is something to do. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o"), the first ball inlet 64 is activated only for a predetermined time (open Be configured to be). The number of times of passage of the second ball entrance 67 is suspended up to four times, and the number of balls retained is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed in the second symbol retention lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off the plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol It may be performed using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the second ball entry port 67 is not limited to 4 times the maximum number of holding balls, similarly to the first ball entry port 64, not more than 3 times, or 5 times or more (for example, , 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be configured not to perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port (starting winning opening) 64 to which a ball can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 makes a lottery for a big hit, and the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is started (started). Then, after the predetermined fluctuation time has passed, the fluctuation display is stopped, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol according to the lottery result is the third symbol display The stop display is made on the effective line L1 of the device 81. In addition, the first ball entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls enter.

  Below the first ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65 is disposed, and at a substantially central portion thereof, a horizontally-long rectangular specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery with the main control device 110 is a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a big hit stop symbol after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed. A stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is lit in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning A game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times as a special gaming state is triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

  In the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided. Can be viewed through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball which has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to an unshown ball discharge path through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is constituted by an 8-bit microcomputer, and the ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and various data etc. temporarily when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A RAM 203, which is a memory for storing, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The main control unit 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83. The ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202c, and a deviation fluctuation pattern table 202d as fixed value data used to control these processes. In addition, in the RAM 203, main processes of the pachinko machine 10 (a big hit lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83, etc.) are controlled. There are various counters to do this.

  Here, various counters provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 and various tables 202 a to 202 d stored in the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. First, FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters.

  For the setting of the display of the big hit lottery and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the big hit lottery, and the first hit type counter C2 used for selecting the big hit symbol A stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set an initial value of the first random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select a fluctuation pattern are used. The second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time updating is performed, and the value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) or at intervals of 4 milliseconds in main processing (see FIG. 28). Furthermore, some of the counters are periodically updated during the main process (see FIG. 28). The updated value of each counter is appropriately stored in a counter buffer 203b set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The counter buffer 203b is an area for storing the updated value of each counter, and the MPU 201 uses the value stored in the counter buffer 203b at the update timing of the counter for each counter. Update the counter.

  The RAM 203 is provided with a holding ball storage area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas). The reserve area is each value of the first collision random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 read out from the counter buffer 203b in accordance with the timing of entering the ball into the first entrance 64. Is an area for temporarily storing (pending). Also, the execution area stores the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine the change pattern of the big hit lottery and the change effect and the stop type at the start timing of the change. It is an area to do.

  When the MPU 201 detects the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), the first random number counter C1 of the counter buffer 203b at that time, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3. The value is stored in one of the first to fourth reserved areas. At this time, when there is no hold in the hold area and all the first to fourth areas are vacant, the value of each counter is stored in the hold first area. If there is only one hold in the hold area and the value of each counter is stored only in the hold first area, the value of each counter is stored in the hold second area. If there are two reservations in the reservation area and the value of each counter is stored only in the first and second areas for storage, the value of each counter is stored in the third area for reservation. If there are three reservations in the reservation area and the values of the counters are stored only in the first to third areas, the values of the counters are stored in the fourth area. Thereby, the values of the respective counters acquired from the counter buffer 203b at the timing of the start winning are stored in the first holding area, the second holding area, the third holding area, and the fourth holding area in the order of the start winning combination. Can. When the start winning combination is detected when the values of the counters are stored in all of the first to fourth areas, the values of the counters at that time are discarded without being held. That is, in the present embodiment, the value of each counter can be held up to at most four start winnings.

  Further, at the start timing of the fluctuation effect, the MPU 201 moves the values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved first area to the execution area, and Based on the value of each counter stored in the execution area, the jackpot lottery, and the determination of the variation pattern of the variation effect and the type of stop symbol are performed.

  In addition, after the value of each counter in the first reserve area is moved to the execution area, the value of each counter stored in the second reserve area is shifted to the first reserve area which is free and stored in the third reserve area. The value of each counter is shifted to the reserved second area, and the value of each counter stored in the reserved fourth area is shifted to the reserved third area. As a result, when the variable effect is started based on the value of each counter held in the holding ball storage area 203c, the holding decreases by one, and one area of the holding area is released.

  Each counter will be described in detail. As described above, the first random number counter C1 is a counter for use in a jackpot lottery, and is updated periodically (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment). The update of the first random number counter C1 was sequentially added one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899), and reached the maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 899) It is done by returning to 0 after. In the case where the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution (when an update is periodically performed from an initial value, the initial value is returned to the initial value by the next update), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time Is set as a new initial value in the first random number counter C1, and updating is performed from the initial value.

  As described above, the first initial random number counter CINI1 is used as the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. For example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also configured of a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is not only updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is executed, but also repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 28).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the counter buffer 203b is stored in the holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the holding ball storage area 203c at the start of fluctuation is the value of a random number (large jack random number; also referred to as a winning value) Make a lottery. The value of the jackpot random number (jump random number value) is set by the jackpot random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the holding sphere storage area 203c (precisely, the holding sphere storage When the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the area 203c matches the jackpot random number value set by the jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined to be a jackpot.

  Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 7A. FIG. 7A is a schematic view schematically showing the jackpot random number table 202a. The big hit random number table 202a indicates the value (big hit random number value) of the first hit random number counter C1 determined to be big hit. In the jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot random number value referred to in the low probability state (that is, a period during which the gaming state is not definite) and a jackpot random number value referred to in the gaming state high probability state (that is, positive variation) And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. As described above, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, the first random number counter C1 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In addition, the number of jackpot random number values that will be jackpots in the low probability state is three, and the value “7, 307, 582” is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a in association with the “low probability state”. . On the other hand, the number of jackpot random number values that will be jackpots in the high probability state is 30, the value “28, 58, 85, 122, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, “448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 681, 716, 750, 809, 836, 866, 892” are associated with the “high probability state”, and the jackpot random number table 202a is It is stored.

  The MPU 201 reads out from the jackpot random number table 203a a jackpot random number value matching the gaming state at the time of making a jackpot determination. Then, the MPU 201 uses the first hit random number counter C1 (the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203c) used for the big hit determination to read the big hit random number value read from the big hit random number table 203a. It is determined whether or not it matches one of the above, and if it matches, it is determined as a big hit.

  That is, in the case where the gaming state is in the low probability state, the first hit is made when the value of the random number counter C1 matches any one of "7, 307, 582". Since the first random number counter C1 is updated in the range of 0 to 899, the jackpot probability in the case of the low probability state is 1/300. Further, when the gaming state is a high probability state, the value of the first random number counter C1 is “28, 58, 85, 122, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, A jackpot occurs when it matches any one of “448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892”. Therefore, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/30.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number value read out from the jackpot random number table 202a in the low probability state and the jackpot random number value read out from the jackpot random number table 202a in the high probability state do not have overlapping values. The jackpot random number value is set. Here, if there is a value that is always used as the jackpot random number value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, the value may be input from the outside, and it is likely that the jackpot may be improperly attracted. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state), changing the value of the random number to be the big hit Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the value of the random number, it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description of the various counters provided in the RAM 203 will be continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and has a maximum value (for example, 0 to 99) In the case of a counter that can take a value, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing) and at the timing when the ball wins at the first entrance 64 (start winning), The first hit random number counter C1 is stored in any one of the first to fourth reserved areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the 1 reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203c is not a large random number, that is, if it is a random number falling out, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect Or, the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") is the one at the time of removal. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the 1 reserve area in the reserve sphere storage area 203c is a random number that makes a big win, the variation pattern and the stop type in the variation effect become the one at the big win . In this case, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

  The value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type counter C 2 and the jackpot type table 202 b stored in the ROM 202.

  Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 7 (b). FIG. 7B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 7B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot type is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  As the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds transitions to a high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot “15R probability variation jackpot”, the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot and 100 During the number of times of fluctuation, there are "15R normal jackpots" that are short-lived, and there are "2R probability variation jackpots" in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a high probability state after two rounds of jackpots.

  In the jackpot type table 202b, each jackpot type is associated with the value of a first hit type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 7A, the value "0 to 39" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variation jackpot, and the value "40 ... 79 "is associated, and the value" 80 to 99 "of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability variation jackpot.

  When the value of the first random number counter C1 is a value that makes a big hit, the big hit type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the big hit type table 202b . For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20", "15R probability variation big hit" is determined as the big hit type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "60", the big hit type is "20" If the 15R normal jackpot is determined, and the value of the first collision type counter C2 is "90", the "2R probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected with a probability of 40% when the jackpot is achieved, the 15R regular jackpot is selected with the probability of 40 percent, and the 2R probability variation jackpot is selected with the probability of 20%. . The probability that each jackpot type is selected when it is a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table 202b.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the explanation of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is for determining the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") in the case of becoming out of position, for example, one by one is sequentially added within the range of 0 to 99, and the maximum value ( In other words, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As the type of stop selected in this embodiment, after reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol and stops, and after the same reach occurs, the final stop symbol There are three stop (rendering) patterns: "reach other than out of front and back" where "stops" except before and after reach symbol and "complete out" where reach does not occur.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), and at the timing when the ball wins at the first entrance 64 (start winning), It is stored in any one of the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203c. Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the 1 holding area in the holding ball storage area 203c is not a random number that makes a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that becomes out, the stop type in the fluctuation effect Will be at the time of departure. In this case, the type of stop at the time of removal is determined based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area.

  In the present embodiment, the ROM 202 is provided with a plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of random numbers for which the stop type is selected, corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state or the low probability state.

  For example, in a high probability state, a table with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is selected so that reach effects are not selected more than necessary because jackpots are easily generated. It becomes easy to be selected as "complete removal". In this table, the range of random numbers corresponding to 98, 99 for “front and back out of reach”, 90 to 97 for “front and back out of reach”, “front and back out of reach” and “reach other than for back and forth out” is narrow It becomes difficult to select out-of-reach and out-of-front reach.

  In the low probability state, a table with a narrow range of random numbers from 0 to 79 corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is selected to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first entrance 64. And it becomes difficult to select "completely out". In this table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than back and forth deviation" is wide as 80 to 97, and "reach other than back and forth deviation" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach display with a long rendering time, so it is possible to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first ball entrance 64 and the fluctuation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear outreach” is set to 98, 99.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is a loop counter for use in determining the fluctuation pattern, and for example, is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). There is. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 28).

  At the start of fluctuation, the MPU 201 refers to the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203c and the fluctuation pattern table stored in the ROM 202, and executes the fluctuation pattern to be executed in the fluctuation type counter CS1 fluctuation effect Decide. The fluctuation pattern determined here is the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation.

  That is, in the main control device 110, only the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation is determined as the fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, the specific variation mode is set by the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. That is, based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 select the third symbol from among the variation modes in which the variation display can be performed in the variation time The details of the variation pattern of the third symbol displayed on the display device 81 are determined. Then, in accordance with the determined variation mode, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to variably display the third symbol, and the sound lamp control device 113 causes the sound output from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the variation display. While making it output, the lamp | ramp of the lamp display apparatus 227 (electric decoration parts 29-33) is made to light-up and blink-display.

  As described above, in the main controller 110, only the fluctuation time is determined as the process of determining the fluctuation pattern, and the details of the fluctuation mode according to the fluctuation time are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. decide. The MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is configured by an 8-bit microcomputer and can not perform complicated processing, but when the change pattern is determined, the main control unit 110 is configured to determine only the change time. As compared with the case where the detail of the variation mode is determined by the main controller 110, the process of determining the variation pattern of the main controller 110 can be performed easily. Further, when the details of the variation mode are determined by the main controller 110, the detailed information of the determined variation mode must be notified to the voice lamp control apparatus 113 etc., and the command necessary for the notification may be There is a risk that it will have to be composed of bytes or more, and sending and receiving of commands may be complicated. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the main controller 110 is configured to determine only the fluctuation time, so if the voice lamp control device 113 or the like is notified of only the information related to the determined fluctuation time Well, the configuration of the command related to the notification can be simplified. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the transmission and reception of the command becomes complicated. In addition, even if only the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation is determined in main controller 110, sound lamp control device 113 or display control device 114 determines the fluctuation mode according to the specified fluctuation time among many fluctuation modes. Since the third symbol display device 81 is configured to perform the fluctuation display in the determined fluctuation mode, a variety of fluctuation effects can be given to the player, thereby improving the player's interest be able to.

  Now, in the present embodiment, as a variation pattern table used to determine a variation pattern (variation time) according to the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern table 202c for jackpot used at the time of big hit, and used at the time of deviation A deviation variation pattern table 202d is prepared. In addition, as the variation pattern table 202d for variation, the variation pattern for variation (probability variation) depending on whether the gaming state is a short time state or a high probability state at a definite variation or a low probability state at a normal time excluding a short time status. A table 202d2 and an off (ordinary) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 are prepared.

  Here, the details of the various fluctuation patterns will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 (c) to 7 (e). First, FIG. 7C is a view schematically showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern table 202c stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7C, the jackpot variation pattern table 202c is divided into groups (groups) based on the jackpot type. Specifically, it is divided into 15R jackpot common to be referred to when the jackpot type is 15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot, and 2R probability variation jackpot dedicated to be referred to when 2R probability variation jackpot. The values of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with each of the divided groups.

  When the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is the big-hit random number value at the start of the change, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first per-classification counter C2 stored in the execution area In response, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area is determined from the jackpot fluctuation table 202c.

  In common with the 15R jackpot, there are a fluctuation pattern A with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, a fluctuation B with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds, and a fluctuation C with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds as fluctuation patterns. As for the correspondence between the fluctuations A to C and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation A is 0 to 10, the fluctuation B is 11 to 99, and the fluctuation C is 100 to 198.

  When the change A (30 seconds) is selected as the change pattern, the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 causes a change effect to be performed in a normal reach mode. When fluctuation B (60 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern, the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 causes the fluctuation effect to be performed in the super reach mode, or the fluctuation effect by the pseudo fluctuation is performed. It will be. In addition, when the variation C (90 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, the variation lamp effect is performed in the special reach mode by the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, or the variation effect due to the pseudo variation Is done.

  Nord reach is a reach with a short fluctuation time, and is a fluctuation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the short reach (so-called, the symbol is aligned with a blind stop). Super reach is a fluctuation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after reaching a fluctuation time longer than the normal reach (for example, a reach that develops from a long reach or a normal reach). In addition, special reach is the first symbol (or third symbol) is aligned after the reach of the fluctuation time longer than the super reach (for example, the development destination from the reach or normal reach further developed after the super reach is a special different from the super reach) Reach etc.) fluctuation pattern. Since the 15R jackpot common table is selected in the case of the 15R probability variation jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot, in order to give the player a sense of expectation, it is easy to select the special reach. However, by configuring the normal reach and the super reach to be selected, it is possible to provide a playability that can expect a jackpot from any reach.

  A large number of normal reach, super reach, and special reach executed by the audio lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 are prepared with different effects even if they have the same fluctuation time. For example, in addition to the normal reach where no character is displayed, a reach where a predetermined character is displayed is prepared when the two symbols on the activated line L1 become the same symbol and reach state or at other timings. ing. In addition, various characters are prepared to be displayed in this case. Furthermore, multiple reach with different presentation content is prepared, such as a reach that changes the back image quickly and is displayed, a reach to which a notice effect before the start of fluctuation is added, and a reach to which a jackpot effect is added by re-change ing. As a result, a variety of fluctuation effects can be performed, and the player's interest can be enhanced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the change B or the change C is determined as the change pattern, not only the reach but also the change effect by the pseudo-link can be performed by the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. The pseudo ream further enhances the player's interest. The pseudo run will be described later with reference to FIGS. 8 to 13.

  The variation pattern selected exclusively for the 2R probability variation jackpot is 2R variation with a variation time of 59 seconds, and the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 198. That is, when the jackpot type is 2R probability variation jackpot, 2R fluctuation (59 seconds) is determined as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  When 2R fluctuation (59 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern, one of the plurality of prepared 2R probability variation jackpot-only fluctuation modes is selected by the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 The variation production is performed in the selected mode. As a variation mode dedicated to 2R probability variation jackpots, for example, a variation mode in which the final first symbol (or the third symbol) stops at a specific symbol together with the character of "chicken" Along with the character, a variation such as that the final first symbol (or third symbol) stops at a specific symbol is included.

  In addition, although the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, it may be configured to be determined using a plurality of other fluctuation type counters. For example, another fluctuation type counter may be provided to finely adjust the fluctuation time to about ± several seconds, and a notice effect for announcing the start of the jackpot or reach effect may be added before or during the fluctuation effect. May be determined by another variation type counter.

  FIG. 7D is a diagram schematically showing an example of the out-of-order (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7D, the out-of-order (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 is completely out-only only and is referred to when the complete out is determined as the type of stop at the out, and the back and forth out of reach and back and forth out It is divided into groups (groups) based on reach common which is referred to when the non-reach is determined and the stop type at the time of out-of-range, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups It is attached. When the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area at the beginning of the change is not a value that will be a big hit (large hit random number value), that is, it is a value that comes off, excluding the time saving state gaming state When in the normal low probability state, the fluctuation corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area according to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area The pattern is determined from the outlier (usually) change pattern.

  For the complete deviation only, as the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation D ends in a short time of 7 seconds and the reach is not realized, the fluctuation time is longer than 10 seconds and the fluctuation D, but the fluctuation E in which the reach is not realized, the fluctuation The time is as long as 55 seconds, and there is a change F in which the pseudo change due to the pseudo-link is performed five times in one change and the reach is not completely established, and the value of the change type counter CS1 In the association of the change D (7 seconds) is 0 to 98, the change E (10 seconds) is 99 to 148, and the change F (55 seconds) is 149 to 198. Further, the reach common includes the fluctuation A (30 seconds), the fluctuation B (60 seconds) and the fluctuation C (90 seconds) as fluctuation patterns described above, and the correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is fluctuation A (30 seconds) is 0 to 98, fluctuation B (60 seconds) is 99 to 190, and fluctuation C (90 seconds) is 191 to 198.

  FIG. 7E is a view schematically showing an example of the deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7E, the out-of-order (probable variation) change pattern table 202d2 is referred to when the complete out-of-range is decided as the stop type at the time of out-of-out Are separated into a reach common to be referred to when a reach other than the front and back out of reach and a reach other than the front and back out are determined as stop types at the time of exit. Then, for each divided group, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with the fluctuation pattern selected in each group. It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern (55 seconds) is not included in the fluctuation pattern selected when reference is made to complete deviation only, and only fluctuation D (7 seconds) and fluctuation E (10 seconds) are selected. In addition, the fluctuation pattern selected when reach common is referenced includes fluctuation A (30 seconds), fluctuation B (60 seconds), and fluctuation C (90 seconds) as in the out-of-order (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1. ).

  If the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a value that does not make a big hit, that is, it is a value that becomes out, execution is performed when the gaming state is a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of definite variation According to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the area, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the execution area is the out (probable change) change pattern table 202d2 It is determined from

  In this deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2, the correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for complete deviation only is such that fluctuation D (7 seconds) is 0 to 190 and fluctuation E (10 seconds) is 191 to 198. It has become. Further, the correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in common reach is 0 to 98 for fluctuation A (30 seconds), 99 to 190 for fluctuation B, and 191 to 198 for various types of outlier special reach.

  Since the out-of-order (probable change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is a table to be referred to when the gaming state is in the time reduction state or in the high probability state at the time of definite change, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64 Become. Therefore, when the time is short or high probability, if the fluctuation F with a fluctuation time of 55 seconds is performed despite complete deviation, or if a relatively long fluctuation E of fluctuation time is performed, the following It may take time until the start of the variable display, giving the player a wait state, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. In addition, it is not preferable because the operation rate decreases as a hole. Therefore, in the case of complete removal, when the gaming state is in the short time state or high probability state at the time of definite change, the fluctuation F is not selected, and the gaming state changes more than when in the normal state excluding the short time state. By configuring the variation D having a shorter variation time than E to be easily selected and performing the start of the next variation display early, the possibility of giving the player a sense of discomfort can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extreme decrease in the operating rate.

  Although the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is selected using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, a plurality of fluctuation type counters may be used in combination (selection of presence / absence of advance notice, etc. may be selected). In addition, when reach is established at the time of detachment, the other variation type counter whether or not the first symbol (or third symbol) to be finally stopped is shifted (for example, one symbol is deviated back and forth etc.) It may be determined by

  Also, although the selection of the outlier type is divided into the outlier (ordinary) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 and the outlier (probable change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2, a plurality of holding balls are present even when the gaming state is normal. (For example, in the case of the maximum of four, three or more), the variable display may be ended early, so that it may be selected by referring to the out-of-order (probable change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. It may be configured to prepare a fluctuation pattern table for normal use or probability change corresponding to the number of holding balls.

  Furthermore, in the fluctuation pattern tables for respective deviations shown in FIG. 7 (d) and FIG. 7 (e), when the fluctuation D and the fluctuation E are simply deviated and the deviation is selected, another table is referred The variation D and the variation E may be selected with a predetermined probability. Of course, also in this case, a table corresponding to the number of holding balls may be prepared.

  Referring back to FIG. 6, the various counters will be described. As described above, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83. For example, 1 is added sequentially in the range of 0 to 250, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250) It is configured as a loop counter returning to zero. In the case where the second random number counter C4 makes one rotation (when an update is periodically performed from an initial value, the initial value is returned to the initial value by the next update), the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time Is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67 which is either left or right. It is acquired when it is done. The number of random numbers to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, it is determined to be won when the value of the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is in the range of "5-153", and the symbol "o" is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol) in the second symbol display device 83. Is lighted and displayed, and the first ball entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time. Note that the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) While being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 25).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and the like are stored in addition to the counter buffer 203b for storing various counters shown in FIG. It has an area and a work area (work area) in which various flags, counters, values of I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 28), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 27) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 26) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 further includes at least a holding ball number counter 203a. The holding ball number counter 203a holds the fluctuation display (the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entering of the ball into the first entrance 64 (start winning). It is a counter that counts the number of balls (the number of waits) up to four times. The initial value of this holding ball number counter 203a is set to zero, and 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 each time the ball is inserted into the first entrance 64 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. (See S1403 in FIG. 25). On the other hand, the holding ball number counter 203a is decremented by one each time the variable display based on entering the ball into the first entrance 64 (start winning) is executed (see S1205 in FIG. 23).

  The value of the holding ball number counter 203a (that is, the holding ball number) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S1406 in FIG. 25). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the holding ball number counter 203a is incremented by one after being entered into the first entrance 64.

  The voice lamp control device 113 is the value of the number of balls in the variable display itself which is suspended in the main controller 110 by the number-of-balls-in-hold command transmitted from the main controller 110 every time the number-of-balls counter 203a is incremented. You can get As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display managed by the holding ball number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the number of holding balls in the actual variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even if the ball has been dropped, it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the command for holding ball number received next.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number-of-held-balls number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of held balls notified by the number-of-held-cells-for-display command.

  On the other hand, in the ball holding ball number command transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, the RAM 203 along with the ball holding timing to the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning timing) together with the ball holding number. The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired from the counter buffer 203b are also included and notified to the audio lamp control device 113.

  When the hold ball number command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to receive the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 included in the hold ball number command. From each value, the stop display mode in the case that the variable presentation based on the corresponding start winning is performed is estimated, and the estimated stop display mode and the value of the number of holding balls at that time indicated by the number of holding balls command From this, it is determined whether or not a series of successive announcement effects are to be given to the fluctuation effects pending at that time.

  The continuous advance notice effect is a kind of advance notice effect that indicates (predicts) that there is a high possibility that the result of the lottery performed in conjunction with the start-up winning is a big hit, and all the fluctuation effects (v ) Is the effect that the same or related symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 together with the fluctuation effect. For example, by displaying the "bubble" image on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the stop display of the change effect over all the change effects being held, the jackpot symbol does not appear as a stop pattern of the change effect Even if the player does not win a big hit, the player continuously sees the “bubble” image immediately after the variation stop over the plurality of variation displays, so that the player gets a big hit after the continuous advance notice effect is finished. It is possible to give a sense of expectation to be obtained, and to motivate the player to continue playing.

  In addition, "Tamago" is displayed during the first variation production, "Hiyoko" is displayed during the second variation production, and "chicken" is displayed during the third variation production, and during the fourth variation production "Chick group" is displayed (however, if the number of holding balls at the time when the continuous advance notice effect is set is 3 or less, the "chicken group" is displayed in the last variation effect for which the continuous advance notice effect is set) Since the symbol displayed by the continuous advance notice effect is gradually changed (step-up) every time when the fluctuation effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the player gradually changes the symbol By looking at, it is possible to give the player the expectation that the chicken group will be a jackpot in the displayed variation effects when the group of chickens is displayed.

  In addition, when the fluctuation presentation for which the continuous announcement production is set is 3, the continuous announcement production is performed in the order of "Tamago" → "Hiyoko" → "chicken group", and the fluctuation presentation for which continuous announcement production is set is 2 In some cases, the continuous advance notice effect is performed in the order of "tamago" → "chicken group", and when the variation effect set for the continuous advance notice effect is 1, "chicken group" is displayed suddenly. Thus, when the number of fluctuation effects set for the continuous advance notice effect is 3 or less, the symbol on the way is skipped and the group of chickens is suddenly displayed, so the player displays the group of chickens displayed suddenly. By looking at it, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the chicken group will be a jackpot in the displayed fluctuation presentation.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the main controller 110 controls the voice lamp control device according to the hold ball number command for each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired at the start winning combination. The sound lamp control device 113 notifies 113 and based on the values of the various counters and the number of holding balls notified by the holding ball number command, determines the start of the continuous advance notice effect start and the setting of the mode of the continuous advance notice effect Do. Thereby, the processing in the main control device 110 can be concentrated on the lottery processing for drawing the gaming state to be transitioned based on the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64, which is the most important processing of the pachinko machine 10 On the other hand, if the MPU 221 with high processing capability is used as the sound lamp control device 113, it is possible to set the execution condition of the continuous advance notice effect in various modes.

  In addition, the number of holding balls and the values of the various counters can be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 by one holding ball number command. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to accurately grasp the correspondence between the values of the various counters acquired along with the start winning and the number of balls held at the time when the starting winning is detected. When the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided, it is possible to accurately grasp the number of holding balls to which the continuous advance notice effect is added. Therefore, the control in the voice lamp control device 113 is facilitated as compared to the case where the number of holding balls and the values of various counters are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by another command. be able to.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specified winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 is outputted from the various switches 208 Various processings are executed based on the control signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 26) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as illumination parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and continuous advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The ROM 222 has at least a detailed variation pattern determination table 222a, and the RAM 223 has at least a holding ball number counter 223a and a detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b. Here, first, the reserved ball number counter 223a will be described, and then the detailed change pattern determination counter 223b and the detailed change pattern determination table 222a will be described.

  The holding ball number counter 223a is, like the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, a fluctuation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter which counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuation effect held in the control device 110 up to four times.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the holding ball number counter 203 a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of holding balls based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of holding balls with the number holding ball counter 223a.

  Specifically, in the case of the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls of the variation effect is added by entering the first entrance ball 64, and the value of the holding ball number counter 203a is added in the main control device 110 When the pending ball number command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received, the value after addition of the pending ball number counter 203 a of the main control unit 110 included in the pending ball number command (ie, pending at the main control unit 110 The stored ball number of the variation effect) is stored in the stored ball number counter 223a (see S2007 in FIG. 32).

  In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the holding ball number counter 203a is decremented in the main control device 110, and the third symbol is transmitted along with the reception. If the mode of the variable display in the display device 81 is set, the value of the holding ball number counter 223a is decremented by 1 (see S2107 in FIG. 33). As described above, since the value of the holding ball number counter 223a is updated according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value can be updated while being synchronized with the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. .

  The value of the holding ball number counter 223a is used to display the holding ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the audio lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the command for holding ball number in the holding ball number counter 223a, or the number of holding ball counter 223a in response to reception of the variation pattern command In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the holding ball number counter 223a after storing or updating, at the timing of updating the value of D, the display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display ball holding number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball number pattern for the value of the holding ball number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled to be displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see S2751 of FIG. 43 (a)). As described above, the value of the holding ball number counter 223a is changed in synchronization with the holding counter 403a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the holding counter 403a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The detailed variation pattern determination counter 223 b and the detailed variation pattern determination table 222 a determine the variation aspect (detail variation pattern) of the variation effect to be started based on the variation pattern notified from the main controller 110 by the variation pattern command. Counters and tables.

  In the present embodiment, no character is displayed during the variation time of 30 seconds as a detailed variation pattern determined when variation A (a variation time of 30 seconds) is instructed from the main controller 110 by a variation pattern command. In addition to the normal reach, there are prepared a plurality of normal reach in which a predetermined character is displayed while changing. In addition, as a detailed pattern determined when fluctuation B (a fluctuation time of 60 seconds) is instructed, a predetermined character is displayed during a fluctuation time of 60 seconds, or a rear image is rapidly displayed. In addition to preparing a plurality of super-reaches, etc., a plurality of pseudo-trains are provided in which the pseudo-variation is executed a plurality of times during the fluctuation time of 60 seconds. As a detailed pattern determined when a change C (a change time of 90 seconds) is instructed, a predetermined character is displayed during a change time of 90 seconds, or a rear image is rapidly changed and displayed. Besides being provided with a plurality of special reach, a plurality of pseudo trains are provided in which the pseudo fluctuation is executed a plurality of times during the fluctuation time of 90 seconds. Also, as a detailed variation pattern determined when 2R variation (a variation time of 59 seconds) is instructed, a plurality of variation modes dedicated to 2R probability variation jackpots with a variation time of 59 seconds are prepared.

  The detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b and the detailed variation pattern determination table 222a are prepared for the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received from the main control device 110. Among a plurality of detailed fluctuation patterns, it is used to determine one detailed fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect to be executed with respect to the fluctuation pattern command.

  The detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b is periodically updated (in the process of S1912 executed in every 1 ms in the main process (see FIG. 30) in the present embodiment). The detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b is configured by a loop counter, and the update thereof is sequentially added one by one within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in the present embodiment) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (99). It is done by returning. Further, an initial value "0" is set in the initial value setting process (S1810) of the RAM executed in the startup process (see FIG. 29) executed at the time of power startup.

  The detailed variation pattern determination table 222a includes various details prepared for each variation pattern (variation A, variation B, variation C, 2R variation) notified from the main controller 110. The value of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b is determined in association with the variation pattern. In addition, the correspondence between the detailed fluctuation pattern and the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b is a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation A, fluctuation B depending on whether the symbol displayed in the fluctuation effect is “big hit” or “out of hand” , C, and 2R)).

  When the MPU 221 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, it reads the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b at that time from the RAM 223. Then, when it is determined from the variation type notified by the received stop type command that a big hit is made, the “big hit” of the variation pattern notified by the received variation pattern command is the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b read from the RAM 223 The detailed variation pattern associated with the value is specified from the detailed variation pattern determination table 222a. When it is determined that the fluctuation type notified by the received stop type command is out of the range, the "outside" of the fluctuation pattern notified by the received fluctuation pattern command is read from the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b read from the RAM 223 The detailed variation pattern associated with the value is specified from the detailed variation pattern determination table 222a.

  The MPU 221 controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 based on the determined detailed variation pattern, and causes the display control device 114 to display the determined detailed variation pattern by the display variation pattern command. Notice. Then, the display control device 114 controls the fluctuation display of the third symbol display device 81 based on the detailed fluctuation pattern notified by the display fluctuation pattern command. As a result, by the sound output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation effect by the determined detailed fluctuation pattern is performed.

  In addition, when the variation D (a variation time of 7 seconds) is instructed by the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, one detailed variation pattern of an aspect in which the variation is completely out after 7 seconds has elapsed is prepared. There is. When a change E (a change time of 10 seconds) is indicated, one change pattern is prepared for the details of the aspect in which the change is completely missed after a change time of 10 seconds has elapsed. In addition, when a change F (a change time of 55 seconds) is instructed, the pseudo change is performed 5 times by the pseudo-train in the change time of 55 seconds, and the details are completely out without reaching the reach finally One variation pattern is prepared.

  Therefore, when any of the fluctuations D, E, F is instructed from the main control unit 110, the MPU 221 selects the detailed fluctuation pattern prepared correspondingly to the value regardless of the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223a. Is determined, and based on that, the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled, or the detailed variation pattern is notified to the display control device 114 by the variation pattern command for display.

  Here, the pseudo-series prepared for the variation B, the variation C, and the variation F will be described. As described above, the pseudo ream is a fluctuation pattern in which fluctuation rendition is performed according to an aspect in which the pseudo stop and re-variation (pseudo fluctuation) of the third symbol are repeatedly performed during one fluctuation display, and this one fluctuation display The greater the number of repetitions of the pseudo stop and re-variation (that is, the number of times the pseudo-variation is continuously performed), the higher the expectation that jackpot is given after the fluctuation display. As a result, the more the simulated fluctuation is repeatedly performed during the one fluctuation display, the player can feel a feeling that the possibility of becoming a big hit increases, so by performing the fluctuation effect by the simulated link, It is possible to increase the interest in the game for the player.

  In the pseudo ream, in order to enhance such an effect, the number of times of pseudo fluctuation performed during one fluctuation display often has a “role”. In this "role", depending on the number of times of the pseudo fluctuation that is performed during the display of one fluctuation, it is played the game what the final fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation production becomes, or whether it becomes a big hit as a result of fluctuation production It is a role to let people know. That is, by this role, the final fluctuation pattern or the fluctuation result of the jackpot lottery is suggested to the player depending on the number of times of the pseudo fluctuation.

  In the conventional pseudo link, for example, when the pseudo fluctuation is performed twice during one fluctuation display, that is, when the number of times of the pseudo fluctuation is “two”, the final fluctuation pattern is unlikely to be reach. It is a probability, but as a result it is given a "role" that is off. In the case where the pseudo fluctuation is performed three times during one fluctuation display, that is, in the case of the pseudo fluctuation number “3 times”, it is determined that the reach will be the final fluctuation pattern, but the probability of being out as a result "Role" is given that is high. In the case where the pseudo fluctuation is performed 4 times during the 1 fluctuation display, that is, in the case of the pseudo fluctuation number “4 times”, it is determined that the final fluctuation pattern becomes the super reach, and the probability of the big hit as a result "Role" is given that is high. In addition, in the case where the pseudo fluctuation is performed 5 times during one fluctuation display, that is, in the case of the pseudo fluctuation number “5 times”, a “role” is given to determine that a big hit is made as a result. In addition, since the number of times of pseudo fluctuation "one time" means a normal fluctuation pattern without fluctuation (that is, fluctuation pattern without pseudo stop and difference fluctuation), "role" in the pseudo ream is not given.

  By giving such a role to the number of times of pseudo fluctuation, it is possible to provide the player with an interest that increases the expectation of becoming a jackpot gradually as the pseudo fluctuation is repeatedly performed, and the following effects can be obtained. That is, even if the result of the jackpot lottery is "off", it is possible to frequently generate pseudo-series having the number of times of the pseudo fluctuation of "2 times" as the fluctuation pattern. Since the fluctuation pattern by the pseudo-run has a long fluctuation time to perform the pseudo fluctuation, even when there is a "deviation", it is possible to perform many fluctuation effects for a long time. Further, even in the case of reaching, by performing the pseudo fluctuation a plurality of times, the fluctuation time can be made longer by the amount of the pseudo fluctuation. Thereby, since it is possible to lengthen the average fluctuation time of one time, even if there is a small number of start winnings (entrance to the first ball entry port 64), the fluctuation effect is interrupted in the third symbol display device 81, a demonstration The situation where the screen is displayed for a long time can be reduced as much as possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enjoy the game without much worrying about the small number of start winnings.

  Because of this effect, the conventional pachinko machine has frequently used the pseudo-train having the above-described role in order to increase the average fluctuation time of one time. However, in the conventional pseudo ream, since the jackpot lottery itself is irrelevant to the selection of the pseudo ream, most of the frequently occurring pseudo reams are two “outs” of pseudo fluctuation. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the player, even if it is thought that the pseudo ream has started, in most cases, the deviation is determined by the second pseudo fluctuation. In addition, even if the third pseudo fluctuation starts, when reach is established there, the pseudo fluctuation ends at the third time, and it is disappointed that the high probability is a gap. Therefore, the player is only interested in whether the pseudo-stop is actually performed or the reach is established in the third pseudo-variation. As described above, in the conventional pseudo-train having the above-mentioned role, even if the pseudo-variation starts, in most cases there is no sense of expectation to the jackpot, and in the end, the player is regarded as earning time of the variation time As a result, there is a fear that the player will be disgusted.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the number of times of the pseudo fluctuation can be given, it is possible to give some expectation for the pseudo run, and in the case of being dislocated as a result, Also, in order to be able to keep having a sense of expectation until the deviation is determined and displayed, each role of the pseudo fluctuation is given a "role". As a result, without making the player bored, it is possible to increase the interest to the game and frequently cause the pseudo ream to extend the average fluctuation time of one time.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 8, the “role” given to the number of times of pseudo fluctuation performed during one fluctuation display in the pseudo train according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing “roles” given to the number of times of pseudo fluctuation performed during one fluctuation display in the pseudo ream for every number of times of pseudo fluctuation.

  In the pseudo link of this embodiment, the pseudo fluctuation is always performed three or more times. That is, the fluctuation does not end at the first and second pseudo fluctuation and the reach is not established, and the pseudo link always continues. And, if the pseudo change performed during one change display is performed three times, that is, the number of times of the pseudo change “3 times”, reach (normal reach, super reach, or special reach) as the final change pattern Is given a "role" that the probability of becoming a jackpot is high. In the case where the pseudo fluctuation performed during one fluctuation display is performed four times, that is, in the case of the pseudo fluctuation number “four times”, the final fluctuation pattern is at least super reach (that is, super reach or special reach). Is determined, and a “role” is given such that the probability of becoming a jackpot is higher than in the case of the “three times” pseudo fluctuation number.

  In addition, in the case where the pseudo fluctuation performed during one fluctuation display is performed five times, that is, in the case of the pseudo fluctuation number “five times”, the following three “roles” are given. The first is a "role" that is determined to be a special reach as a final change pattern and to be a jackpot. The second is the "role" in which the complete deviation is determined without reaching the reach as the final change pattern. The third is a "role" in which the final fluctuation pattern is not reached, but at the same time, it is pseudo-stopped with an out-of-hand pattern, but then re-variation is performed and the jackpot is determined. That is, if the pseudo fluctuation is performed 5 times during the 1 fluctuation display, in the 5th pseudo fluctuation, whether the special reach is established and the jackpot is determined, or the complete deviation is determined without the reach being established Or, re-variation is performed after the false stop of the outfall, and the jackpot is determined.

  Although details will be described later, various detailed variation patterns of the pseudo-series are prepared so that such a “role” is given in the pseudo-series (for the variation pattern of the pseudo-series relation, FIG. ~ See Figure 13). Further, the detailed change pattern determination table 222a is set such that the degree of expectation that the jackpot will occur when the reach is established increases as the number of times of the pseudo change increases. That is, as described later, in the present embodiment, various types of pseudo-series are selected as detailed variation patterns for each of the variation B and the variation C, and the pseudo-series is selected for each type of pseudo-series. By setting the selection probability (appearance probability) in the detailed change pattern determination table 222a, as the number of times of pseudo change increases, the expectation of becoming a big hit at the time of reach establishment is increased.

  By giving the number of times of the pseudo fluctuation a role as shown in FIG. 8, the following effects can be obtained. That is, in the case where the fluctuation display by pseudo-link is performed, the more the number of the pseudo-changes performed during the one fluctuation display, the higher the expectation of becoming a big hit when reach is established. Similarly, the more the simulated change is performed during the one change display, the more the player can feel the possibility of becoming a big hit, and the player gets more fun with the game. be able to.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even after passing five times of pseudo-variation, which is the maximum number of times the pseudo-variation is repeated in the pseudo-series, there is a case where the case of being out occurs. As a result, even if the game is lost by lottery, the main control device 110 selects a long-time fluctuation pattern (in the present embodiment, the fluctuation F with a fluctuation time of 55 seconds) as the fluctuation pattern, and the sound lamp In the control device 113 and the display control device 114, during the long time (55 seconds) of the fluctuation time, it is possible to perform the fluctuation display of the pattern that the pseudo fluctuation is performed five times and the complete deviation is finally made. And the pseudo | simulation change frequency | count 5 times is also a pseudo | simulation run with the highest expectation which will be a big hit, when reach is formed. In other words, when a long fluctuation pattern (fluctuation F) of fluctuation time is selected at the time of departure, complete deviation occurs after passing the number of times of pseudo-variation (5 times) that the highest degree of expectation of becoming a big hit when reach is established. The player can continue to increase the sense of expectation that a reach will be established and a jackpot during the process leading to the detachment even if the player is completely disappointed in the pseudo ream. Therefore, even if the false reiteration is repeated, the player can continue playing the game happily by having a sense of anticipation as the jackpot.

  Moreover, even after passing through 5 times of pseudo fluctuation which is the maximum number of times of pseudo fluctuation being repeated in the pseudo ream, by configuring so that the case of becoming out may occur, the number of times that the pseudo fluctuation is repeatedly performed, It can be said that the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display can be prolonged. That is, in the case of the conventional pseudo-train, the probability of being out is lowered as the number of pseudo-variations increases, so when generating pseudo-trains in the case of out-of-order, most of them have two or three pseudo-variations. I needed to. Therefore, the fluctuation time was also about 30 seconds. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even after passing 5 times of pseudo-variation, which is the maximum number of times the pseudo-variation is repeated in the pseudo-series, it is configured such that a case of deviation may occur. The time can be increased to about 55 seconds. Moreover, as described above, in the case where the number of times of simulated fluctuation is five, the player is expected to go through five times of simulated fluctuation since the expectation that the jackpot is achieved is the highest when reach is established. Even if completely out of the way, in the process leading up to the outset, it is possible to increase reach and become a jackpot expectation by repeating the pseudo fluctuation, and it is not bothersome to approach the outset. Therefore, it is possible to make frequent occurrence of the fluctuation display by the pseudo ream which is dislocated after 5 times of the pseudo fluctuation, and for the purpose of making the player enjoy the game without having much concern for the small number of start winnings. One average fluctuation time can be lengthened. In other words, it is possible to increase the interest in the game without causing the player to get bored, and to increase the average fluctuation time of one time by making the pseudo ream frequently occur.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the type of reach performed when reach is established after five times of pseudo fluctuation is limited to a specific type of reach such as a special reach. Therefore, when the fifth simulated fluctuation is started, the player plays a game while having an expectation that the specific kind of reach (special reach) is established by the fifth simulated fluctuation. Can. In addition, since the specific type of reach is a high-expected special reach with the highest jackpot, the expectation for the establishment of the special reach further enhances the player's feeling. Therefore, even if the player loses the player completely as a result of the fifth pseudo fluctuation, the player is made to play the game while raising interest in the game without making the player bored Can.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at least reach is established when the pseudo fluctuation ends before the pseudo fluctuation number (5 times) having the highest degree of expectation at the time of reach establishment (5 times of the pseudo fluctuation number). And, it is configured to be a big hit with a predetermined probability. As a result, in the case where the number of times of pseudo fluctuation is 3 or 4 times, even if it is out, it is always a reach, so the player is expected to be a big hit until the finalized display is made in the variable display. You can keep feeling. Thus, the player's interest can be given to the end. In addition, when reach does not hold and comes off (complete out), it is only when the number of times of pseudo fluctuation is five, so it is a case where pseudo fluctuation ends when the number of times of pseudo fluctuation is 3 or 4 Also, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of becoming a big hit with a predetermined probability, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest to be known to the pseudo group even if the number of pseudo variations is small. In addition, in the case of complete disconnection in the pseudo run, the number of times of pseudo fluctuation is always five. Therefore, even in the case of complete disconnection in the pseudo link, it is possible to maximize the player's expectation that the reach will be established and the jackpot be achieved in the process leading to the disconnection. Therefore, the player can be entertained sufficiently even if the pseudo ream is completely removed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the “role” given the number of times of the pseudo fluctuation is five times does not become the reach as the final fluctuation pattern, and not only the “role” that the complete deviation is determined but also the final fluctuation pattern As the reach and not stop, but at the same time, stop pseudo off with a symbol, but also includes the "role" that will be re-changed and the jackpot is determined, so after 5 times of the pseudo-change, complete Even if the out-of-point symbol is displayed, the player can continue to have the expectation that re-variation may be performed and the jackpot may be determined, until the determination display is made. That is, even if the game is completely dislocated in the pseudo ream, since the player can continue to give the player a sense of anticipation for the jackpot until the symbol completely disapproved is displayed, the player is given an effect by the pseudo ream. Can be entertained to the end.

  Furthermore, in the pseudo link according to the present embodiment, as described above, the first and second pseudo fluctuations do not end the fluctuation or the reach is not established. As a result, in the pseudo-link, the pseudo-variation is always performed three or more times, and therefore it is possible to extend the average fluctuation time of one time. In addition, since it is possible to suppress or avoid the fact that the pseudo ream ends in the second pseudo fluctuation and becomes out of place as in the conventional case, the player is given the impression that the pseudo ream is merely an effect of earning time. We can suppress giving. Furthermore, in the case where an effect is given with storylines in the pseudo-variation that is repeatedly performed in the pseudo-series, an effect that allows the story to be understood among the first and second pseudo-variations in which the pseudo-variation is continued. By displaying, it is possible to execute an effect that is more understandable to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG.9 and FIG.10, the presentation content (display content displayed on 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) of the pseudo | simulation series in this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 9 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect when the artificial fluctuation is performed three times and the vehicle finally reaches the reach, and FIG. 9 (b) is the artificial fluctuation four times. 9C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect when it finally enters the reach, and FIG. 9 (c) shows the contents of the effect when the artificial fluctuation is performed five times and the element finally reaches the reach It is the schematic diagram which showed typically. Further, FIG. 10 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the effect in the case where the pseudo fluctuation is performed five times and the final deviation occurs, and FIG. 10 (b) is a pseudo fluctuation. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect when the round is performed, and the symbol is falsely stopped once in the fifth false change, and then re-change is performed to determine the jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, the pseudo ream in the present embodiment is performed by an effect by a battle type fighting game in which a character on the player side and a character on the other side (the pachinko machine 10 side) fight in a fighting game. When the first pseudo-variation is started, an effect of starting the battle type fighting game is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the pseudo-stop, and is switched to the battle type fighting effect. Then, a battle type fighting game is performed for each pseudo-variation.

  In this battle type fighting game, the disappointing symbol is displayed as a pseudo stop at the pseudo stop of the pseudo variation, and a face with a sad expression that the character on the player side loses is displayed. Then, the characters "CONTINUE" are displayed on the screen, the player is informed that a rematch is to be performed, and the next pseudo change is started, and a match between the player's character and the other's character The fighting game is resumed. After the battle type fighting game and the display at the time of the pseudo stop are repeatedly performed for a predetermined number of times of the pseudo fluctuation, in the final pseudo fluctuation, the effect contents defined for each pseudo run are displayed.

  The switching from the normal effect to the battle type fighting effect may be performed at the first stop of the pseudo fluctuation. For example, the character on the player's side may be switched to the battle type fighting effect by suddenly being hit by the character on the other side and displaying the characters "CONTINUE".

  For example, in the case of pseudo-runs in which the pseudo-variation is performed three times and the final reach into the reach, as shown in FIG. 9A, the pseudo stop display of the out pattern is performed in the first two pseudo-variations At the same time, a reach is established in the third pseudo-fluctuation after the effect of notifying the player that the player's character loses the match and loses the match and displays a rematch will be displayed by the "CONTINUE" display. At the same time, the player character is displayed with a happy face to win the battle, and "CONTINUE" is displayed to notify that the rematch is to be performed. Then, it becomes a normal reach, a super reach, or a special reach, and the fighting type fighting game according to each reach is played again. Then, in the case of a big hit, the player's character is displayed to win and the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed, and the big hit effect is entered as it is. If the player's character loses the game, the player's character loses the display, and the game is displayed.

  Also in the case of pseudo-sequences in which the pseudo-variation is performed four times and the final reach to the reach, the same pseudo-series effects are performed as in the case where the pseudo-variation is performed three times. That is, as shown in FIG. 9B, in the first three times of the pseudo-variation, the pseudo stop display of the out-of-pattern is performed and the face of the player's character sorrows to the match is displayed and "CONTINUE" After the effect of notifying that the rematch is to be played by the display is performed, in the fourth pseudo-variation, the face on which the player's character is pleased to win the match is displayed with the establishment of the reach, and “CONTINUE The effect of notifying that the rematch is to be performed is displayed. Here, in the case where the artificial fluctuation is performed four times and the reach finally reaches the reach, as described above, at least the "super reach" has a "role" determined. Therefore, after that, it becomes a super reach or a special reach, and the fighting type fighting game according to each reach is played again. Then, in the case of a big hit, the player's character is displayed to win and the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed, and the big hit effect is entered as it is. If the player's character loses the game, the player's character loses the display, and the game is displayed.

  In addition, also in the case of pseudo-sequences in which the pseudo-variation is performed five times and finally entering the reach, the same pseudo-series effect as in the case where the pseudo-variation is performed three or four times is performed. That is, as shown in FIG. 9C, in the first four times of the pseudo-variation, the pseudo stop display of the out-of-pattern is performed and the face of the player's character sorrows to the match is displayed, and “CONTINUE After the effect to announce that the rematch is to be played is displayed, the face on which the player's character is pleased to win the match is displayed with the establishment of the reach in the fifth simulated change, and “CONTINUE The effect of notifying that the rematch is to be performed is displayed. Here, when the pseudo fluctuation is performed five times and finally reaches the reach, as described above, it has a "role" that is determined to be the special reach and to be the jackpot. Therefore, after that, it becomes a special reach, and a fighting type fighting game corresponding to each reach is played again. Then, the player character is displayed to win and the jackpot symbol is fixedly displayed, and the jackpot effect is entered as it is.

  On the other hand, in the case of pseudo-runs in which the pseudo-variation is performed five times and the complete disengagement finally occurs, as shown in FIG. 10A, the first four pseudo-variations undergo the pseudo stop display of the misplaced pattern At the same time, the player's character loses the battle and displays a sad face, and "CONTINUE" is displayed to notify that the rematch is to be performed. Furthermore, even in the fifth pseudo-variation, the pseudo stop display of the out-of-pattern is performed, the face on which the player's character loses the match and the sadness is displayed, and the rematch is performed by the "CONTINUE" display. An announcement is given. After that, a pseudo stop state is displayed for a few seconds, but the player's character falls down and a display that can not be raised is displayed, "GAME OVER" is displayed as it is, and then the completely removed symbol is displayed. .

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 10 (b), in the case where the pseudo fluctuation is performed five times and the symbol is temporarily stopped at the fifth pseudo fluctuation and the symbol is re-mutated and the jackpot is determined. As with the case where the pseudo fluctuation is performed 5 times and the game is completely missed in the end, the first 4 pseudo fluctuation causes the character on the player's side to lose the match and sorrows that the pseudo stop display of the out-of-pattern is performed. A face is displayed, and an effect of notifying that a rematch is to be performed is performed by the “CONTINUE” display. Then, even in the fifth pseudo-variation, the pseudo stop display of the out-of-pattern is performed, the face on which the character on the player side loses to the match and the sadness is displayed, and the rematch is performed by the "CONTINUE" display. An announcement is given. After that, while the pseudo stop state is displayed for several seconds, a display is performed in which the player's character falls down and can not be raised, and "GAME OVER" is also displayed as it is. However, in the effect by this pseudo ream, after the character on the player side which has fallen falls, re-variation is performed, the character on the opposite side is defeated in reverse, and the jackpot symbol is finalized and displayed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the effect of the pseudo ream is performed as a battle type fighting rendition in the battle fighting game, the pseudo ream can have a story character. Therefore, since the player can concentrate on the pseudo-series having the story nature, the interest of the player can be further enhanced.

  Further, in the pseudo-train according to the present embodiment, the first and second pseudo-variations do not end the fluctuation or reach is not established, and the pseudo-variation is continuously performed at least three times. Thus, the first and second simulated fluctuations can make it easier for the player to understand the story of the simulated ream. Therefore, even if the pseudo ream is executed with a story effect, the contents can be presented to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, so that the player can be more easily embedded in the story.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the pseudo-fluctuation is performed five times and the pseudo-fluctuation is performed five times, and the pseudo-fluctuation is performed five times in the case where the final deviation completely occurs (ie, in the case of FIG. 10A). In the case of the pseudo ream when the re-variation is performed and the jackpot is determined (ie, in the case of FIG. 10 (b)) after the symbol is temporarily stopped due to the pseudo fluctuation, the pseudo stop for the fifth pseudo fluctuation is performed. Exactly the same rendition is performed until it is heard (until the "GAME OVER" display is made). Therefore, after five times of pseudo fluctuation, even if a completely out of sight symbol is falsely displayed, the expectation is displayed that the jackpot may be determined after the re-fluctuation is performed, and the display is made The game can be kept by the player until Therefore, even if the game is completely dismounted in the pseudo ream, the player can continue to give the player a sense of anticipation for the jackpot until the symbol completely disapproved is displayed. Can be entertained to the end.

  Moreover, in the effect by this pseudo | simulation series, as shown in FIG.9 and FIG.10, the countdown display is performed on the display screen lower right of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. As shown in FIG. This countdown display is a display in which the number of times of pseudo fluctuation is counted down from the maximum number of times of pseudo fluctuation (five times in the present embodiment), "5" is displayed in the first pseudo fluctuation, and then pseudo fluctuation ( Alternatively, the value decreases by 1 each time the fighting type fighting game is repeated. Thus, by performing the countdown display, it is possible to inform the player of the number of times of the pseudo fluctuation in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, since the degree of expectation to the jackpot is increased as the value of the countdown display decreases, the player can gradually increase the sense of expectation for the jackpot along with the countdown display. Therefore, this countdown display can make it easier for the player to concentrate on the effect by the pseudo ream.

  Note that the face of the character on the player's side who is sad at the time of the pseudo stop may lose the match and the expression may be changed each time the pseudo stop is repeated. For example, you may deepen the sad expression gradually. As a result, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be made stronger and greater by the player losing. In addition, the character on the player's side, which is displayed when the reach is established, is displayed when the reach is established in the case where the reach is established in the fourth simulated fluctuation than in the case where the reach is established in the third simulated fluctuation The face may be made to be more delighted, and it will be displayed at the time of reach establishment, in the case where the reach is established by the fifth time of pseudo fluctuation rather than when the reach is established by the fourth time of pseudo fluctuation. The character on the player's side may be happy to win the battle, and the face may be made larger. As a result, it is visually played that the expectation that the jackpot is achieved is higher if the simulated variation is more frequently performed and the reach is established depending on the facial expression of the player's character displayed at the time of the reach establishment being pleased Can appeal to Thus, the player's interest can be further enhanced.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 to 13, fluctuation A (variation time 30 seconds), fluctuation B (variation time 60 seconds), fluctuation C (variation time 90 seconds), and fluctuation F (variation time 55 seconds) With respect to each detailed fluctuation pattern that can be selected by the audio lamp control device 113 when instructed by the fluctuation pattern command from the control device 110, the temporal flow of the detailed fluctuation pattern will be described. It is needless to say that the temporal flow of each detailed fluctuation pattern described here is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, fluctuation D (fluctuation time 7 seconds) and fluctuation E (fluctuation time 10 seconds) indicated in the case of complete deviation, and 2R fluctuation (fluctuation time 59 seconds) indicated in the case of 2R probability variation jackpot Also, since no pseudo link is performed, and the change is only performed according to a well-known change pattern (pattern to stop and display after high-speed change), the description of those temporal flows is omitted.

  First, FIG. 11A is a time chart showing a normal reach selected when the main controller 110 instructs the fluctuation A (a fluctuation time of 30 seconds) by a fluctuation pattern command. When fluctuation A is indicated, a detailed fluctuation pattern is selected from a plurality of normal reach. As for these normal reach, as shown in FIG. 11 (a), any change is started and high-speed change is performed for 10 seconds, and after 10 seconds from the start of change, after reach is established, change due to normal reach for 20 seconds Is performed, and 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation, a definite display of jackpot or out is made.

  Next, FIG. 11 (b) is selected when the fluctuation F (a fluctuation time of 55 seconds) is instructed by the fluctuation pattern command from the main controller 110, “simulation fluctuation is performed five times and the reach is finally reached. It is a time chart which shows the pseudo | simulation series (5 times pseudo | simulation fluctuation | variation * deviation) which rushes into "(simulation series of Fig.10 (a)). When a change F is indicated, a detailed change pattern is always selected as this “five-time change + out” pseudo-run. As shown in FIG. 11 (b), this pseudo ream is subjected to high-speed fluctuation (pseudo fluctuation) for 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the temporary stop of the symbol is temporarily suspended It will be. Next, high-speed fluctuation (simulation fluctuation) is performed again for 10 seconds, and then, a simulation stop of the symbol is performed again. After 5 times of this high speed fluctuation (pseudo fluctuation) and the false stop of the design, it is pounding feeling as to whether the deviation is decided or becomes a big hit between 50 seconds and 55 seconds from the start of fluctuation As an effect given to the player, an effect indicating whether or not the character on the player side falls and gets up is displayed. Then, 55 seconds after the start of the change, the symbol completely out is displayed.

  Next, FIGS. 12 (a) to 12 (e) are time charts showing detailed fluctuation patterns selected when fluctuation B (a fluctuation time of 60 seconds) is instructed by the fluctuation pattern command from main controller 110, respectively. FIG. 12 (a) is a time chart showing super reach, and FIG. 12 (b) is a “simulative sequence that is performed three times and finally rushes to a normal reach (three times pseudo-run + normal reach) FIG. 12C is a time chart showing “pseudo-run (three times pseudo-run + super reach) in which the pseudo-variation is performed three times and finally reaches the super reach”. d) is a time chart showing “pseudo-run (three times pseudo-run + special reach) where pseudo-run is performed 3 times and finally enters special reach”, FIG. Times is carried out, after the pattern out in a pseudo-fluctuation of the fifth was once pseudo stop, is a time chart showing the pseudo-continuous (5 times pseudo fluctuation + revival) "when re-change is to hit the jackpot is determined done.

  When fluctuation B is indicated, the detailed fluctuation pattern is selected from among a plurality of super reach, or "3 times pseudo fluctuation + normal reach", "3 times pseudo fluctuation + super reach", One is selected from 3 times of pseudo fluctuation + special reach, and 5 times of pseudo fluctuation + revival.

  As shown in FIG. 12 (a), the super reach starts to be changed for 10 seconds with high speed change, as shown in FIG. Then reach is established. And, after reach is established, fluctuation by normal reach is performed for 20 seconds, and it develops into super reach 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation. After that, the change due to the super reach is performed for 30 seconds, and after 60 seconds from the start of the change, the final display of the jackpot or the deviation is made.

  As shown in FIG. 12 (b), the simulated train by "3 times simulated fluctuation + normal reach" is performed after 10 seconds of high-speed fluctuation (simulated fluctuation) and simulated stop of the out-of-hand pattern being repeated twice, The high-speed fluctuation for 10 seconds is performed again, and then the reach is established (after 30 seconds from the start of the fluctuation). And, after reach is established, fluctuation due to normal reach is performed for 30 seconds, and after 60 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, a final display of jackpot or out is made.

  As shown in FIG. 12 (c), the pseudo run by "3 times pseudo fluctuation + super reach" is performed after 10 seconds of high speed fluctuation (pseudo fluctuation) and pseudo stop of out-of-patterns being repeated twice. 10 seconds of high-speed fluctuation is performed again, and then reach (after 30 seconds from the start of fluctuation) is established. And after reach is established, the change by normal reach is performed for 10 seconds, and develops into super reach 40 seconds after the start of the change. After that, the change due to the super reach is performed for 20 seconds, and after 60 seconds from the start of the change, the final display of the jackpot or the deviation is made.

  As shown in FIG. 12 (d), the simulated train by "three times simulated fluctuation + special reach" is the same as "three times simulated fluctuation + super reach" shown in FIG. 12 (c) for 40 seconds from the start of the fluctuation. The change production advances with the flow. And it develops into a special reach 40 seconds after the change start. After that, the variation by the special reach is performed for 20 seconds, and after 60 seconds from the start of the variation, the final display of the jackpot is made.

  As shown in FIG. 12 (e), in the pseudo-series due to "5 times pseudo fluctuation + resurrection", the fluctuation effect advances in the same flow as "5 times pseudo fluctuation + out" for 50 seconds from the start of the fluctuation. Next, it is shown whether or not the character on the player's side falls up as an effect to give the player a thrilling feeling such as whether the deviation is determined or becomes a big hit between 50 seconds and 55 seconds from the start of the fluctuation. An effect is displayed, and further, in 55 to 60 seconds from the start of the change, the character on the player side rises, an effect to win the character on the other side is performed, and a re-variation of the symbol is performed. Then, after 60 seconds from the start of the change, the symbol of the big hit is displayed.

  Next, FIGS. 13A to 13D are time charts showing detailed fluctuation patterns to be selected when fluctuation C (a fluctuation time of 90 seconds) is instructed by the fluctuation pattern command from main controller 110, respectively. FIG. 13 (a) is a time chart showing the special reach, and FIG. 13 (b) is a schematic diagram of the pseudo-sequence which is performed four times and finally enters the super reach. FIG. 13 (c) is a time chart showing “reach)”, and FIG. 13 (c) is a time chart showing “pseudo-run (4 times pseudo-run + special reach) where the pseudo-variation is performed 4 times and finally reaches special reach”. 13 (d) is a time chart showing “pseudo-run (5 times pseudo-run + special reach) in which the pseudo-variation is performed 5 times and finally reaches the special reach”.

  When the change C is instructed, the detailed change pattern is selected from one of a plurality of special reach, or "4 times pseudo change + super reach", "4 times pseudo change + special reach", One is selected from "5 times simulated fluctuation + special reach".

  Special reach, except for some exceptional special reach (for example, super reach with revariation, etc.), starts to fluctuate and is subjected to high-speed fluctuation for 10 seconds, as shown in FIG. 13 (a). Then reach is established. And, after reach is established, the change by normal reach is performed for 20 seconds, and it develops into super reach 30 seconds after the start of change, and further develops into special reach 60 seconds after the start of change. After that, a 30-second special reach variation is performed, and 90 seconds after the start of the variation, a jackpot confirmation display is made.

  As shown in Fig. 13 (b), the pseudo run by "four times pseudo fluctuation + super reach" is performed after 10 seconds of high speed fluctuation (pseudo fluctuation) and pseudo stop of out-of-patterns being repeated three times 10 seconds of high-speed fluctuation is performed again, and then reach (after 40 seconds from the start of fluctuation) is established. And, after reach is established, fluctuation by normal reach is performed for 20 seconds, and it develops into super reach 60 seconds after the start of fluctuation. After that, the change due to the super reach is performed for 30 seconds, and after 90 seconds from the start of the change, the final display of the jackpot or the deviation is made.

  As shown in FIG. 13 (c), the simulated train by "4 times pseudo fluctuation + special reach" is the same as "4 times pseudo fluctuation + super reach" shown in FIG. 13 (b) for 60 seconds from the start of fluctuation. The change production advances with the flow. And it develops into a special reach 60 seconds after the start of fluctuation. After that, the variation by the special reach is performed for 20 seconds, and after 60 seconds from the start of the variation, the final display of the jackpot is made.

  As shown in Fig. 13 (d), the simulated train by "5 times simulated variation + special reach" is performed after 10 seconds of high-speed variation (pseudo-variation) and simulated stop of the out-of-design symbol repeated four times 10 seconds of high-speed fluctuation is performed again, and then reach (after 50 seconds from the start of fluctuation) is established. And, after reach is established, fluctuation by normal reach is performed for 10 seconds, and it develops into special reach 60 seconds after the start of fluctuation. After that, a 30-second special reach variation is performed, and 90 seconds after the start of the variation, a jackpot confirmation display is made.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12 (d) and FIGS. 13 (a), 13 (c) and 13 (d), when it is developed to special reach, it is always configured to be a big hit. It may be configured to be a jackpot by probability, but also to be out of place.

  As mentioned above, the pseudo ream when the reach is established after three times of the pseudo fluctuation ("3 pseudo fluctuation + normal reach", "3 pseudo fluctuation + super reach", "3 pseudo fluctuation + special reach") Is selected when the change B (the change time of 60 seconds) is notified from the main controller 110 by the change pattern command. The simulated sequence ("4 simulated motion + super reach", "4 simulated motion + special reach") in the case where the reach is established after 4 times of simulated fluctuation is changed by the fluctuation pattern command from the main controller 110 It is selected when a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is notified. The pseudo ream ("5 times pseudo fluctuation + special reach") in the case where the special reach is established after 5 times of pseudo fluctuation and the big hit is determined is fluctuation C (variation time 90 seconds by the fluctuation pattern command from the main controller 110 ) Is selected when notified. When a complete runout is determined after 5 times of pseudo-variation ("5 times pseudo-variation + out"), the main control unit 110 notifies the main controller 110 of a variation F (a variation time of 55 seconds) by a variation pattern command Is selected. And, after passing 5 times of pseudo fluctuation, after the pattern is temporarily stopped by false movement in the 5th pseudo fluctuation, the re-variation is performed and the jackpot is determined, the pseudo ream ("5 times pseudo fluctuation + revival") It is selected when the change B (the change time of 60 seconds) is notified from the main controller 110 by the change pattern command.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The RAM 223 additionally shows a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, and whether or not to start variable display. It has a change start flag (not shown) and the like. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 32) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed. Also, the fluctuation start flag is turned on when the stop type command output from the main control device 110 is received (see SX2004 in FIG. 32), and is turned off when the fluctuation display setting in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S2102 in FIG. 33).

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the vibration sensor 228, the frame button 22 and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22. When the player operates the frame button 22, the voice output control device 113 changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81. 226, controls the lamp display device 227, and instructs the display control device 114. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The vibration sensor 228 is a sensor for detecting the vibration applied to the pachinko machine 10 and is attached to the back of the game board 13. In the pachinko machine 10, since entering the ball into the ball entry is an important factor in determining the gaming state, the flow of the ball is changed by vibration, and the ball is intentionally prevented from entering the ball entry. There is a need. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that the player or the like has given vibration to the pachinko machine 10, an error command for transmitting the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and includes an error type including an error type. It transmits to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation display (variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81) Effects and continuous advance notice effects are controlled. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 26) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, even if the pachinko machine 10 is another model in which the jackpot lottery probability and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot are different models, the model of the specification with exactly the same symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since the display control device 114 is a common part, cost reduction is achieved.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are dedicated program ROMs (for example, a conventional game machine) Instead of providing and storing the ROM 22) described in JP-A-2006-223598, the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 187, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that configures the control program. In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory storing the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as described above, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The character ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 is connected to the image controller 237 for image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234. The video data is transferred to the video RAM 235 for normal use and the video RAM for normal use 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. As described above, the third symbol is displayed without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing the dedicated program ROM (for example, the ROM 22 described in JP-A-2006-223598) as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the device 81 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. It is possible to suppress the increase in failure rate due to

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234 a or the like. Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Conversion of the data address of (for example, refer to JP-A-2006-223598).

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured by two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234 b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 187 a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is used as one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234 d, the ROM controller 234 b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234 c from the NOR ROM 234 d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released are NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. And fixed value data (for example, a display data table, an additional data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, each by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) Are programmed to be transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233c according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, an additional data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (FIG. 34 (FIG. 34 (FIG. 34 (FIG. 34)) which is stored in the program storage area 233 a as the second predetermined address is completed after the boot process by the boot program (see S 2201 of FIG. Set the start address of the program corresponding to a) (see S2202).

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. The MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 187a2 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 21) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 35B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 435 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is at least provided with a power-on main image area 235a, a power-on variation image area 235b, a back image area 235c, a third symbol area 235d, a character symbol area 235e, and an error message image area 235f. .

  Similar to the power-on main image area 189a of the first embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a is from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. The third symbol display device 81 is an area for storing data corresponding to the main image at the time of power on. In the power-on time variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power on, and the ball entering the first ball entrance 164 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by the fluctuation effect when it is done.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2203 and S2204 in FIG. 34A).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 shows the power-on display on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 immediately after power-on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  When the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after power on, Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at the time of the power on, as shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in Fig. 15 (c), the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" is shown at the lower right position on the display screen of the main image at power-on, as shown in Fig. 15 (c). The power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol is alternately displayed repeatedly during the fluctuation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. If the result is judged as “big hit”, the image shown in FIG. 15 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the fluctuation production, and if it is “displaced”, the image shown in FIG. Display for a fixed period of time after stopping.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs drawing of the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. it can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 264, the power change image area when the power is turned on. The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 15 (b) and (c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 As described above, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 264 while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately it can.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, similarly to the rear image area 189b of the first embodiment. Here, with reference to FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, the range of the back surface image stored in the back surface image area 235 c among the back surface image and the back surface image will be described. FIGS. 16 and 17 are explanatory diagrams for explaining three types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. 16 (b) is for the back stage B corresponding to the "empty stage" and FIG. 17 is for the back plane C corresponding to the "island stage". Are shown respectively.

  Of the back faces A to C, the back face images corresponding to the back faces A and B are, as shown in FIG. 16, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 It is prepared in the ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  In each of the images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as “image for scrolling”), the images are configured such that the back surface images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and the third symbol display device 81 is smoothed. The back image is scrolled by a series of connections.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to "at-the-city stage" or "empty stage", the MPU 231 sets the initial position of the display area between position a and position a 'of the corresponding back image first. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image as time passes, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and display is further performed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the position a to the position c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left direction.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17, the rear surface image on the rear surface C displays the third display in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →... Of FIG. It is displayed on the device 281. Specifically, in the back surface C, the image of the mountain that soars on the island, the image of the sandy beach that spreads to the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are the third pattern in a state where the displayed position is fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the image of the sky that spreads over the mountain changes its color tone over time.

  When the player changes the stage to the “island stage” by operating the frame button 22, a rear surface image shown in FIG. 17A is displayed as an initial rear surface image of the rear surface C. In the rear image shown in FIG. 17A, an orange sky indicating morning glow is displayed. Then, as the time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time, the rear image shown in FIG. 17B is displayed. In the back image shown in FIG. 17B, a bright blue sky indicating day is displayed. Next, as the time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time passes, the rear image shown in FIG. 17C is displayed. In the rear surface image shown in FIG. 17C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and gradually to orange. And after predetermined time progress, it returns to the back surface image shown to Fig.17 (a), and the back surface image of Fig.17 (a)-(c) is displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 again.

  Next, in each rear surface image, the range of the rear surface image stored in the rear surface image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 16A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire surface of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the stage in the city, which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, all the image data of the back A corresponding to the stage in the city displayed frequently is the back image area By being resident on 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16B, the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage has a partial area of the rear surface, that is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b Is stored in the rear image area 235c of Also, the back surface C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 17 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIG. 17 (a) and FIG. 17 (b) excluding FIG. Is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process of FIG.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at any timing based on the player's intention, even if the frame button 22 is operated at any timing. In order to change the back image instantly, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all back images, but in such a case, it becomes very useful as the resident video RAM 235. A large amount of RAM must be used, which may lead to increased costs.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear surface image displayed first when the stage is changed is in the range from the position a to the position a 'or in the range of FIGS. The image data between the position a and the position b including the initial position and the image corresponding to the image between FIG. 17 (a) and FIG. 17 (b) are stored in the back image area 235c Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the rear image area of the resident video RAM 235 is changed when the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. By using the image data resident in 235c, the initial positions of the back surface B and the back surface C are immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. So also may be displayed while changing the scrolling display or color over time. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to the partial range image is stored for the back surface B and the back surface C, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  Also, the back surface B scrolls the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 after the image at the initial position is displayed. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b 'to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, the image data from position b 'to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay is used to scroll the range from the position b ′ to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image of the initial position is displayed, the back surface C displays the images of FIGS. 17A and 17B using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 17 (a) so that transfer of the image data of the image corresponding to FIGS. 17 (b) to 17 (c) and 17 (c) to 17 (a) can be completed from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of ~ (b) is set. Thus, while the images of FIGS. 17A and 17B are displayed, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 17B to 17C and FIGS. Since the image of FIG. 17 (a)-(b) is displayed using image data resident in the back image area 235c of the video RAM 235 for residence, it is stored in the video RAM 236 for normal use without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the back image, the images in FIGS. 17B to 17C and 17C to 17A can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sequentially as time passes. it can.

  In the back surface B and the back surface C, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 14) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, since the rear image data stored in the rear image dedicated sub area is not overwritten by other image data, the rear image can be reliably displayed.

  Further, on the back surface B, an image corresponding to an image between the position b ′ and the position b in the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 Data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

  Furthermore, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the display area using the image data of the normal video RAM 236 as the display area, then, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as the display area. Do. Thereby, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection so that the image between the position a to the position c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with the numerals "0" to "9" being the third symbol are resident. As a result, in the case where the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, there is no need to read out the image data from the character ROM 187 one by one. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64, although the fluctuation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, the fluctuation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an unintended condition.

  In the third symbol area 235d, characters such as a main symbol with a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a symbol with a rear symbol, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to a main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. Be Thereby, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the demonstration effect, a main symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81, as in the first embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e, whereby display control is performed. When changing the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading out image data previously resident. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message pictorial area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10, as in the error message image area 189e of the first embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of the vibration sensor 228 attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 displays the generation of the vibration error by the error command. Notify 114 Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the graphic area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, since it is not necessary to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 435, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is It can be displayed immediately.

  As described above, the normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is determined in advance.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, an additional data table buffer 233e, a transfer data table buffer 233f, a pointer 233g, a drawing list area 233h, a clock counter. 233 i, at least a stored image determination flag 233 j, and a drawing target buffer flag 233 k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and main control The effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the one effect based on the command from the device 110 is displayed by the additional data table describing the display content to be displayed with the passage of time and the display data table Among the image data used in the first effect, transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect, a demonstration effect A display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect and the restart effect is prepared.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next change effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has passed since the one change effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, the finalized display effect is the third symbol display device in the case where the stop symbol is determined and displayed by receiving a determination command (display determination command) from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 after the change effect. It is an effect displayed on 81. For example, when the stop design is a design that is out of pattern, an effect that emphasizes the release is performed, and when the stop design is either 15R probability big hit, 15R normal big hit, or 2R probability big hit, each jackpot is emphasized A presentation is performed. The player can easily judge the game value given by the content of the stop symbol by visually recognizing the finalized display effect.

  In addition, the restart effect is centered on the predetermined position when the confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 is not received even if a predetermined time has passed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed with the end of the fluctuation effect. This is an effect of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an image in which the third symbol is vibrated (rocked). When the player visually recognizes that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the third symbol display is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the stop symbol is not determined at that time. Can be recognized.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect, the fixed display effect and the restart effect is stored. In addition, as for the display data table for variation, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Furthermore, if the fluctuation display pattern instructed by the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 does not match the stop symbol to be displayed at the time of the stop display of the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table, for example, fluctuation A display pattern table for special variation is also prepared, which is used when the stopping symbol of the deviation is instructed from the main control unit 110 when the presentation pattern is a fluctuation presentation pattern for hit. This special variation causes the third symbol to be changed and displayed at high speed until the determination command (the determination command for display) transmitted from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 is received, and the determination command is received In accordance with, a special stop symbol (for example, symbols displayed as “3” “4” “1” in order from the left row) is decided to indicate the detachment as a stop symbol.

  If the variation effect pattern instructed by the main controller 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 does not match the stop symbol to be displayed at the time of the stop display of the variation effect, the display control device 114 causes the main control device 110 to There is a possibility that it is not possible to correctly reflect the result of the lottery that has been made and to perform the fluctuation effect or the fixed display effect. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, in such a case, special variation effects are performed, and after the variation display, a special stop symbol indicating a special detachment is finalized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so the main control device Even if the result of the lottery at 110 is out, it is possible to prevent the final display effect of the big hit being performed on the third symbol display device 81 by mistake. In addition, even if the special stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, if the lottery result in the main control unit 110 is a big hit, the gaming state in the actual pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the special gaming state, so The player can continue playing with peace of mind. Furthermore, by setting the finalized display as a special stop symbol, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state even if the finalized display is out, Even if the finalized display is out, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state, so that the player can be prevented from feeling uneasy.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the display data table for variation among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. Note that if the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), light in the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variable display data table is constant, only the rear surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear surface image, is defined. This back surface type indicates which of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage") is displayed, or the back surface A to C Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. Moreover, when specifying to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface type is also described together with information specifying which back surface image to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. Also, the range of the rear view image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear surface image different from the rear surface A to C, the rear surface image to be displayed is specified from the rear surface type.

  In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The start address of the display data table "0000H" describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 18) describes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233g is initialized. Then, the pointer 233g is incremented by one each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, next, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 21) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. Thus, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233g, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 281.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the additional data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the additional data table. As described above, the additional data table describes the display contents to be displayed with the passage of time for the effects to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the one effect based on the command from the main control device 110 It is Here, "adding to one effect" means changing the display content of one effect based on a command from the main control device 110, and for example, an image not normally displayed in one effect is displayed It includes the concept of displaying another effect over the one effect, changing the color tone of part or all of the one effect, or changing the image displayed in the one effect. .

  That is, the additional data table is a drawing content necessary for adding and displaying an image which is not usually displayed with respect to one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 110 Or, the drawing contents necessary for changing the color tone of a part or all of the one effect, and the drawing contents necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in the one effect are set. It is.

  In the present embodiment, continuous notice displayed in addition to the fluctuation effect displayed by the fluctuation display data table selected based on the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) from main controller 110 The case where the display content for displaying an effect is prescribed by the additional data table will be described.

  That is, the additional data table is prepared, for example, corresponding to the continuous notice effect to be additionally set for the fluctuation effect, and specifically, "foam" and "tamago" which are display modes of the continuous notice effect. An additional data table corresponding to each of "chick", "chicken" and "chicken group" is stored in data table storage area 233b.

  In the additional data table, the contents (drawing contents) of the image for one frame to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address are defined in detail in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object to be additionally displayed in an image for one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information, is defined.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 19, in association with the address “0097H” defined in the display data table, for two effects (effect 1 and effect 2) and two characters (character 1 and character 2), respectively. The sprite type (effect type, character type), the display position, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the semitransparent value, the alpha blending information, the color information, and the filter specification information are defined. On the other hand, if there is no display item to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, it means that there is no additional display item to be added corresponding to the address in the additional data table. Null data is defined (address “0001H” in FIG. 19 corresponds).

  As in the case of the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the additional data table, and the final address of the additional data table (in the example of FIG. In "00 FDH", "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, a drawing corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the additional data table The contents are described.

  When the MPU 231 receives a continuous notice command from the audio lamp control device 113, it reads an additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice mode indicated by the continuous notice command from the data table storage area 233b, and adds the additional data table of the work RAM 233 described later. Store in buffer 233e. Then, every time the pointer 233g is updated, the display content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g is selected from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. The image contents to be drawn next are specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 21) to be described later is created.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 19, when the pointer 233g becomes "0097H", the MPU 231 is defined by the various sprites defined by the address "0097H" of the display data table by the address "0097H" of the additional data table. The sprites of effect 1, effect 2, character 1 and character 2 are added to create a drawing list, and the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. On the other hand, when the pointer 233g is "0001H", since the null data is defined at the address "0001H" of the additional data table, it is judged that there is no display object to be added, and the address "display data table" The drawing list is generated based on the various sprites defined in “0001H”. Further, in the additional data table, when the information defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g is "End" information, and when the pointer 233g indicates an address not defined in the additional data table (for example, In the example of FIG. 19, it is determined that the display object to be added does not exist even when the pointer 233 g indicates an address after “00 FEH”, and drawing is performed based on various sprites specified in the display data table. Generate a list.

  Then, by transmitting the generated drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction for drawing the image is issued. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233g, and the drawing contents defined in the additional data table are added, so that the display data table and the additional data table An image as specified is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (eg, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When other effect images (e.g., continuous preview effect images) are to be displayed in addition to the effect images (e.g., variation effect images) to be displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81, other effects to be displayed additionally By setting the additional data table corresponding to the image in the additional data table buffer 233e, the effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed. Thus, for example, when there are 32 types of original effect images and 5 types of other effect images to be displayed additionally, temporarily displaying an image in which another effect image is defined for each original effect image. If a data table is prepared separately, 32 × (1 + 5) = 192 kinds of display data tables must be prepared, but like the pachinko machine 10, data tables corresponding to other effect images are used as additional data tables. By separately defining, 32 + 5 = 37 types of displays and additional data tables may be prepared, and the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed. Therefore, a data table corresponding to various presentation modes can be stored in the capacity prepared in the data table storage area 233b, and it is possible to easily achieve a wide variety of presentation images.

  Further, as in the pachinko machine 10, by setting another effect image to be additionally displayed as an additional data table, after setting a display data table corresponding to the original effect image in the display data table buffer 233d, Even when it is determined to display another effect image to be additionally displayed, an additional data table corresponding to the other effect image is added without changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Only by setting in the data table buffer 233e, another effect image to be additionally displayed can be added to the original effect image and easily displayed.

  Further, since the additional data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d and the additional data set in the additional data table buffer 233 e From the table, while updating the pointer 233g for each time, it is possible to easily identify the drawing contents defined in the address indicated by the pointer, and from these, it is easy to make one drawing list corresponding to one frame Can be generated. Therefore, in addition to the effect performed based on the command from the main control device 110, even if the display of other effects is determined by the audio lamp control device 113 or the like, the effect to be displayed additionally By defining the display content in the additional data table, various effects can be easily displayed from a small number of data tables.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of sprites used in effects specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Are described (addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 20 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (meaning the address “0002H” in FIG. 20).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 20, In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233f of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233g is updated, the display content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g is selected from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. From the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is made while specifying the drawing list (see FIG. 21) to be described later. Is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 20, when the pointer 233g becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 transfers transfer data information specified at the relevant address in the transfer data table to the display data table and the additional data table. It adds to the drawing list created based on it, and transmits the drawing list after the addition to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233g is "0002H", since the null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233 f in accordance with setting of the table in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The simplified image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 15 (a) to 15 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And in the main processing (see FIG. 34A) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2205 in FIG. 34A). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S3105 in FIG. 46 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2401 in FIG. 35), and the simplified image display flag When 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 35B) and the simplified display setting process (FIG. 35B (b) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. ) Is executed). On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 36 to 40) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 41 to 45) are performed.

  Also, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3001 of FIG. 46A), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Since resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46B) for transferring resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simplified image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 47) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233g one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 21) in which the contents of the instruction for image drawing for the image is described is generated. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The additional data table buffer 233 e is displayed in addition to the effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in accordance with the command from the audio lamp control device 113. It is a buffer for storing an additional data table corresponding to an effect (such as continuous notice effect). By storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 temporarily writes null data, which means that there is no display item to be additionally displayed in the additional data table buffer 233e. Clear the contents.

  Thereafter, based on a command from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 causes the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to be displayed in addition to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If there is an effect to judge the presence / absence and to be additionally displayed, an additional data table corresponding to the effect mode is selected from the data table storage area 233b, and the selected additional data table is added to the additional data table buffer 233e. Store.

  Then, while adding the pointer 233g one by one, the MPU 231 stores the drawing contents defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233g and the additional data table buffer 233e in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. In the additional data table, based on the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g, the below-mentioned drawing list (see FIG. 21) is described in which the contents of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 are described for each frame. . Thereby, the effect corresponding to the additional data table is added and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Further, when the additional data table is not stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, the null data is stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. Therefore, in the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table Is displayed as it is.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 f is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d according to the command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command etc. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233 f. When all the image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Because of this, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data meaning that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 f.

  Then, while adding the pointer 233g one by one, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f. (That is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 21) described later (see FIG. 21) in which the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 g is a display data table, an additional data table, and a transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233 d, the additional data table buffer 233 e, and the transfer data table buffer 233 f. It is for designating the address which should acquire the transfer data information of data. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233g to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 for which the image drawing process for one frame is completed (S2403 in FIG. 35) In the reference), the pointer update process (see S2711 in FIG. 41) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233g is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 displays the address indicated by the pointer 233 g from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233 e each time the pointer 233 g is updated. The drawing contents specified in the table are specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 21) to be described later is created, and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer The transfer data information of the image data is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, when the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233 e, An effect corresponding to the additional data table may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233 e. . Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, if the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233h is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is an area for storing a drawing list instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 21, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third pattern (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite, such as a design. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233 d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 g and the other images to be drawn. Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on the contents of (for example, a reserved image for displaying a reserved ball number pattern, a warning image for notifying occurrence of an error, etc.) While creating the drawing list by rearranging the detailed information for each sprite.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are specified from the sprite type specified in the display data table and the additional data table, and the contents of other images. Is generated according to the type of sprite. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 displays a display data table and additional data for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy the information specified in the table as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) The detailed information corresponding to the respective sprites is described in the order of the characters (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number pattern 1, holding ball number pattern 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233i is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed (see FIG. 35). Every time the display setting process is performed, the time counter 233i is decremented by one (see S2713 in FIG. 41). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233i becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  For all the sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, whether or not the stored image discrimination flag 233j stores the image data corresponding to that sprite in the image storage area 236a of the ordinary video RAM 236 It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not.

  The stored image discrimination flag 233 j is generated by an initial setting process (see S 2202 in FIG. 34A) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image determination flag 233 j generated here is set to “off” which indicates that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236 a.

  The stored image determination flag 233 j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 47) executed by the MPU 231. . In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image determination flag 233j and transfers the image of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3216 in FIG. 47). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set (see S3217 in FIG. 47). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3302 in FIG. 48).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. Every time drawing processing of processing (refer to FIG. 35) is executed (refer to S3302 of FIG. 48).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon turning on the power, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (in this embodiment, in a cycle of 2 ms). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing and The main processing will be described.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S1101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203. Similarly, when the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1 and the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S1103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 899, 99, 99, 250), each clears to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

  Next, a process for displaying by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S1104), and then, the first ball entrance The start winning process associated with the winning to 64 is executed (S1105). The details of the fluctuation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 23 and 25, respectively.

  After the start winning process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S1106), and the other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S1107), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and firing the ball on condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the variation process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this variation process (S1104). This fluctuation process (S1104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and controls fluctuation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is currently occurring (S1201). The jackpot includes the middle of a jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. If the result of the determination is that the jackpot is in progress (S1201: Yes), the present processing is ended as it is.

  If the jackpot is not inside (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S1202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S1202: No) Then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S1203). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped (S1203: No), the present processing ends. As a result, the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 only for a predetermined time, so the player can be made to visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S 1204, if the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation stop (S 1203: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (the holding ball number N of the fluctuation display being held in the main controller 110) It is determined whether or not is greater than 0 (S1204), and the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (holding ball number N) is not 0 (S1204: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (holding ball number N) is decremented by 1 (S1205), and the data stored in the storage ball storage area 203c is subjected to shift processing (S1206). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the pending first to fourth areas of the pending ball storage area 203c toward the execution area, ie, pending first area → execution area, pending second area → The data in each area is shifted in such a way that the first area for holding, the third area for holding, the second area for holding, the second area for holding, and the third area for holding. After the data shift process, the variation start process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1207). The change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1204, when it is determined that the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (holding ball number N) is 0 (S1204: No), a state in which demonstration effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81, ie, It is determined whether or not a demo is in progress (S1208). In this determination process, after the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, the value of the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (holding ball number N) is determined to be larger than 0 Determine that the interval is under demonstration.

  Then, if it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S1208: No), a demo command is set (S1209), and the processing is ended. If it is determined that the demo is in progress (S1208: Yes), This processing ends as it is. The demo command set in the process of S1209 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 28) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits this demo command as it is to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 performs control to display a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with this demo command.

  Here, the demonstration command is set, as described above, when there is no holding ball when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped. Therefore, when the variable display is not started when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped, the demonstration command can be set to display the demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in the process of S1202 that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether a changing time has elapsed (S1210). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time has elapsed If not (S1210: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S1211), and this processing is ended.

  In this embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses from when the fluctuation is started. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, a display mode for lighting the red LED is set.

  The variation process is executed every two milliseconds, but if the illumination color of the LED is changed each time the variation process is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the illumination color of the LED. Therefore, the counter (not shown) is incremented by one each time the fluctuation processing is executed so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 200 when the counter reaches 200. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S1210: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1212). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by the variation start process (S1207) described later with reference to FIG. That is, according to the process of S1206, whether or not a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203c is determined. The pattern that becomes the 15R probability variation big hit after the big hit by the value of the counter C2 (the probability change big hit that the maximum round number shifts to high probability state after 15 round hits) or 2R probability variation big hit (high round number is high probability status after 2 round big hits) It is determined whether the symbol to be converted to a probability variation jackpot) or the symbol to be a 15R normal jackpot (the maximum round number is a jackpot to shift to a low probability state after 15 round jackpots).

  In this embodiment, the blue LED is turned on when the jackpot becomes a 15R probability variation jackpot after the big hit, the red LED is turned on when the 2R probability variation jackpot is reached, and the red LED and the blue LED when the 15R normal jackpot is hit Turn on the LED. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what is made to light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S1212, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect of the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. In order to make the decision, a decision command is set (S1213), and this processing ends. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 114 as it is. The third symbol display device 81 stops the variation when the variation time has elapsed, and the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined by receiving the confirmation command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the fluctuation start process (S1207) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S1207). This variation start process (S1207) is executed in the variation process (see FIG. 23) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203c. As well as performing a "big hit" or a "deletion" lottery (judgment determination), an effect pattern (a change effect pattern) of a change effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

  In the change start process, first, a lottery (permission determination) process is performed to determine whether or not a big hit based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203c (S1301). Whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the game state at that time. As described above, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state, "7, 307, 582" associated with the "low probability state" in the big hit random number table 202a becomes the big hit random number value and the pachinko machine When the ten gaming states are in the high probability state, “28, 58, 85, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, corresponding to the“ high probability state ”in the jackpot random number table 202a. 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 596, 618, 681, 716, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are the jackpot random number values. In the process of S1301, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203c is compared with these jackpot random number values, and if they match, the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot Determine.

  Then, when it is determined as a big hit as a result of the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203c, The display mode is set (S1302). In this process, the jackpot type set by the first jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202c, that is, the maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after the big hit of 15 rounds, or the maximum round number is 2 Display mode of the first symbol display device 37 based on whether 2R probability variation jackpot to shift to high probability state after big hit of round or 15R normal big hit to shift to low probability state after 15 round big hits The lighting state of the LED 37a is set. In addition, based on the transition state after the big hit, the big hit type (15R positive variation big hit, 2R positive variation big hit, 15R normal big hit) is a stop type in order to stop and display the big hit symbols corresponding to various big hits in the third symbol display device 81 Set as

  Next, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) at the time of jackpot is determined (S1303). The determination of the fluctuation pattern is performed based on the jackpot type set in the process of S1302, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202c. When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S1303, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set.

  If it is determined that the jackpot is not a jackpot in the process of S1301 (S1301: No), a display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S1304). In the process of S1304, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and set to the display mode corresponding to the symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203c. As the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is a front or back outreach, a reach other than back or forth out, or a complete out. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set so that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is different depending on whether the state is the high probability state or the low probability state. There is.

  Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of out of step is determined (S1305). This variation pattern is determined by the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability state, time in the middle, or low probability state excluding time in the middle), the stop type set in the process of S1302, the change type counter CS1 It is carried out based on the value of and the out-of-variation fluctuation pattern table 202d. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1305, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set.

  When the process of S1303 or the process of S1305 is finished, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern type determined in the process of S1303 or S1305 is set (S1306). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the stop type set in the process of S1302 or S1304 is set (S1307). The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 28). Ru.

  Next, the start winning process (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S1105). This start winning process (S1105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), determines whether or not the first ball entrance 64 has a winning (start winning), and if there is a starting winning From the holding process of the value indicated by the various random number counters and the value indicated by the held various random number counters, the permission judgment process of starting the continuous preview effect in the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S1401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S1401: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (the holding ball number N of the fluctuation effect being held in the main controller 110) is It is determined whether it is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S1402). And if there is no winning on the first ball entry 64 (S1401: No), or even if there is a winning on the first ball entry 64, it is not the number of operation holding balls N <4 (S1402: No) , Return to timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is a winning on the first entrance 64 (S1401: Yes) and the number of holding balls N <4 (S1402: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (holding ball number N) Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 updated in the step S1103 is added to the vacant storage area of the storage ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. Are stored in the first area (S1404).

  Next, the values of the number N of holding balls updated by the process of S1403 and the values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the holding ball storage area 203c by the process of S1404. Is created (S1405), and the created ball retention number command is set (S1406), the start winning process is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. This holding ball number command is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 28). The sound lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls in the sound lamp control device 113 based on the number of holding balls N included in the holding ball number command, and the various counters included in the holding ball number command. Based on the value, the presence or absence of execution of continuous advance notice effects is determined.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1501), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The NMI interrupt process described above is also executed by the payout and emission control device 311 in the same manner, and the NMI interrupt process causes the RAM 213 to store power-off occurrence information in the RAM 213. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S1601). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1604), and if it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process proceeds to S1611. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S1611 also in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S1611. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the process of S1712 of FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1611, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1611). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process (S1612, S1613) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S1612, S1613) of the RAM 203 is executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1612), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1613). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S1605: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S1604: Yes) S1607: Yes), while holding the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S1608). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery for transmitting the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side back to the gaming state at the time of driving power supply interruption is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  In the process of S1610, an interrupt is permitted (S1610). And, it shifts to the main processing which it mentions later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As a summary, each process of S1701 to S1705 is executed as a periodic process of 4 ms cycle, and the counter update process of S1708 and S1709 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, each control device on the sub-side (peripheral control device, etc.) stores output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 234 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. The external output processing to be sent to is executed (S1701). Specifically, it determines the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S1101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22), and if there is the winning detection information, corresponds to the winning ball number to the payout control device 111. Send an award ball command. Further, the ball holding ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the determination command and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703), and then, the special winning opening of the variable winning device 65 (large opening) Opening) A large opening opening and closing process is performed to open or close the opening 65a (S1704). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether the specified winning opening 65a has a prescribed number of balls. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, display control processing of a second symbol (for example, a symbol of “o” or “x”) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1705). Simply stated, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 267, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 The second symbol variation display is carried out. Then, the second lottery is conducted based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is hit, the electrically operated combination attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main processing (S1707) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1707: Yes), the process proceeds to S1701, and the above-described processes from S1701 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main processing (S1707: No), the first main processing is performed until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. (1) Update of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1708, S1709).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1708). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer 203b of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1702 (S1709).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1701 to S1705 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1706, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: Yes), the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power supply off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 26 has been executed, so the processing at the time of the power shutoff after S1710 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is prohibited (S1710), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1711). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1712), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1713), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1706 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1701 to S1705, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1708 and S1709 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1701. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S1701. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting the value to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1701. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, each control process performed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, referring to FIG. 29, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1801). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S1918 is performed (see FIG. 30) due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “temporary power failure”). It is determined whether or not it is started during the execution of (S 1802). As described later with reference to FIG. 30, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1915 in FIG. 30), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off processing of S1918. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1918 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1802: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1918 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1803).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1803: Yes), the process proceeds to S1804 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1803: No), the process proceeds to S1808.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. From the above, it is judged that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1803: Yes), and the process shifts to S1804. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S1918 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When it is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1803: No), and the process moves to S1808.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1802: Yes), the current start-up process is performed after the instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S1918, the audio lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1804 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1804, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1804). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1805: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1806). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1808, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1918 is performed (see S1917 in FIG. 30). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1918 is executed, the process of S1808 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1918 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1809), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1810). The permission is set (S1811), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1808 when the power-off flag is off is that, for example, the current startup processing has been started after the power has been completely shut off, and thus the processing of S1804 to S1806 is performed. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: No), S1809, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1810, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1810), and interrupt permission is set. Then (S1811), the process proceeds to the main processing.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1809 is that, when the process of S1808 is reached via the processes of S1804 to S1806, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1804, If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the process of S1901 has been executed last time (S1901), and 1 ms or more has elapsed. If not (S1901: No), the process proceeds to S1913 without performing the processes of S1902 to S1911. In the process of S1901, to determine whether 1 ms has elapsed is a process relating to setting of display and sound (that is, setting of effects) in S1902 to S1912, and it is necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms) This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display processing of S1913 and the command determination processing of S1914 in a short cycle, while there is no Since the process of S1914 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the process of S1913 is executed in a short cycle to execute the command received by the command determination process. Setting based on the above can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1901 (S1901: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set in the processes of S1903 to S1914 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114. Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1909 described later (S1903), and the power on notification process is executed (S1904). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1905 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1905, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1906). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to 114. In the pending number display updating process, a process of lighting the pending lamp 285 in accordance with the value of the pending ball number counter 223a is performed.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring and rendering process is executed (S1907). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the variable effect is not executed or during a high speed change period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and a rear surface image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when the advance notice character appears at the start of the variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during reach production produces a sense of expectation for the jackpot. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be set as a decision button for selecting one reach effect among a plurality of reach effects. When the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1907 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process ends, a vibration sensor input monitoring process is performed (S1908). The vibration sensor input monitoring process is a process of monitoring an input signal from the vibration sensor 228 and detecting whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is vibrated.

  Here, the details of the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908), first, the output value (vibration level) of the vibration sensor 228 is read from the vibration sensor 228 (S1951), and it is determined from the read output value whether the vibration level is a predetermined level or more. (S1952). As a result, if the vibration level is less than the predetermined level (S1952: No), the vibration sensor input monitoring process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 30).

  On the other hand, if the vibration level is equal to or higher than the predetermined level (S1952: Yes), it is determined that vibration is given to the pachinko machine 10, and an alarm sound is set to be output from the audio output device 226 (S1953) An error command for notifying the control device 114 of the occurrence of the vibration error is set (S1954), and the process returns to the main processing (FIG. 30). Thereby, in the display control device 31, a process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image notifying of a vibration error is performed.

  Returning to FIG. 30, the description of the main processing is continued. When the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908) is ended, next, a lamp editing process is executed (S1909), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1910). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting. Further, when the output of the alarm sound is set by the vibration sensor input monitoring process (see FIG. 31) (see S1953), the output pattern of the alarm sound is set by this sound editing / output process, and the alarm sound is voice It is output from the output device 226.

  After the process of S1910, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1911), and then the counter update process is performed (S1912), and the process shifts to the process of S1913. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1909 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing / output processing of S1910 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the counter updating process, the various counters provided in the RAM 223 are updated. For example, the update of the detailed change pattern determination counter 223b is performed in the counter update process. Updating of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b is performed by sequentially adding one by one within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in the present embodiment), and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (99).

  In the process of S1913, in order to display the fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is sent to the display control device 114. The variable display process, which is a process set to transmit, is executed. Details of this variation display process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variation display process, the command determination process is performed to perform the process according to the command received from the main control unit 110 (S1914). Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1914 ends, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1915). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1915 (S1915: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1917), and the power-off process is executed (S1918). After execution of the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1919), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of the power-off is not stored in the process of S1915 (S1915: No), it is judged whether the RAM 223 is destroyed or not based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1916). If not (S1916: No), the process returns to S1901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1916: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a command determination process (S1914) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1914). This command determination process (S1914) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Further, this process also determines the start of the continuous advance notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 when the ball holding ball number command is received from the main control device 110.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control apparatus 110. It is determined whether or not it has been made (S2001). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2001: Yes), the fluctuation pattern type (any of fluctuation AF, 2R fluctuation) is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (SX2002), and the process returns to the main processing. . The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and a detailed variation pattern is determined based on the stored variation pattern type in a variation display process (see FIG. 33) described later. Then, the detailed variation pattern determined here is notified to the display control device 114 by the variation pattern command for display, and the third symbol display device 81 produces a variation effect according to the notified detailed variation pattern. To be done.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S2001: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (SX2003). When it is determined that the stop type command has been received (SX 2003: Yes), the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (SX 2004), and the stop type indicated by the stop type command is extracted. It is stored in the RAM 233 (S2005).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (SX 2003: No), it is then determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S2006). When it is determined that the holding ball number command has been received (S2006: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the holding ball number command (ie, held by the main control device 110) The number of balls held for variation presentation) is extracted, and this is stored in the number of balls held counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2007).

  Here, since the holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball wins (start winning) at the first ball entrance 64, the processing of S2008 is performed every time there is a starting winning. The value of the holding ball number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the holding ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. The value of the holding ball number counter 223a can be corrected and adjusted to the value of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control unit 110.

  Further, after the processing of S2007, a display holding sphere number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the holding sphere number counter 223a updated by the processing of S2007 is set (S2008). Thereby, in the display control device 114, processing is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls.

  Thereafter, the continuous advance notice determination process is executed (S2009), and the process returns to the main process. In this continuous advance notice determination process, the value of the number of balls held from the main controller 110 by the number of balls held command and the values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 It is determined whether or not to perform a continuous advance notice effect for displaying the advance notice effect image continuously over the change effect pending at the time. Also, in the case of performing the continuous notice effect, as the continuous notice effect mode, is the same effect type continuous notice effect mode in which the same image (for example, "bubble" image) is displayed across a plurality of fluctuation effects? Display the related images in order each time the fluctuation effect is performed (for example, display each image in the order of "Tagogo"-> "Hiyoko"-> "Chick"-> "Chick group") Step-up type continuous notice effect Determine whether to make it an aspect.

  Specifically, the determination of whether or not to perform the continuous advance presentation effect is the time when the ball number command for holding balls is transmitted based on the values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3. It is performed based on the estimation result and the number of holding balls held at that time, as a result of the lottery held corresponding to the holding ball and the type of stop after the variation effect. For example, when it is estimated that the stop type after the change effect is the 15R probability variation jackpot or the back and forth reach, it may be determined that the continuous advance notice effect is performed with a predetermined probability. Further, in this case, it may be determined that the continuous advance notice effect is performed with a high probability as the number of holding balls increases.

  In addition to this, when the result of the lottery that is estimated is a big hit, regardless of the type of stop, continuous notice effect may be performed with a predetermined probability, and the result of the lottery is out. Even when the stop type is reach, that is, when it is estimated that the reach other than the front and back out of reach and the front and back out of reach, continuous notice effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. As described above, the condition for determining to perform the continuous advance notice effect may be appropriately set in accordance with the game property to be provided to the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, as the continuous notice effect mode, the condition of whether the same effect type or the step-up type may be appropriately set. For example, a random number counter may be provided inside the audio lamp control device 113, and the continuous notice effect mode may be determined according to the value of the random number counter.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the main controller 110 controls the voice lamp control device according to the hold ball number command for each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired at the start winning combination. The sound lamp control device 113 notifies 113 and based on the values of the various counters and the number of holding balls notified by the holding ball number command, determines the start of the continuous advance notice effect start and the setting of the mode of the continuous advance notice effect Do. Thereby, the processing in the main control device 110 can be concentrated on the lottery processing for drawing the gaming state to be transitioned based on the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64, which is the most important processing of the pachinko machine 10 On the other hand, if the MPU 221 with high processing capability is used as the sound lamp control device 113, it is possible to set the execution condition of the continuous advance notice effect in various modes.

  In addition, the number of holding balls and the values of the various counters can be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 by one holding ball number command. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to accurately grasp the correspondence between the values of the various counters acquired along with the start winning and the number of balls held at the time when the starting winning is detected. When the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided, it is possible to accurately grasp the number of holding balls to which the continuous advance notice effect is added. Therefore, the control in the voice lamp control device 113 is facilitated as compared to the case where the number of holding balls and the values of various counters are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by another command. be able to.

  As a result of the process of S2006, when it is determined that the hold ball number command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed. After that (S2010), it shifts to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed control The command is set to be sent to the device 114. The demo command and the confirmation command received from the main control device 110 are set as a display demonstration command and a display confirmation command by the process of S2010, and are transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the variation display process (S1913) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this variation display process (S1913). This fluctuation display process (S1913) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, displays fluctuation effects in the third symbol display device 81 A display stop type for generating a display change pattern command based on the change pattern command received from the main control unit 110 and transmitting the stop type extracted from the stop type command to the display control unit 114. This is processing for generating a command and transmitting the generated display variation pattern command and display stop type command to the indication control device 114. Also, with the display of the fluctuation effect, the value of the holding ball number counter 223a is updated, and the display holding ball number command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the updated holding ball number and generated. When it is determined that continuous advance presentation effects are to be made with respect to the change effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display change pattern command, the continuous change command is set after the display change pattern command.

  In the fluctuation display process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2101). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, off) (S2101: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from main controller 110, this fluctuation display process is performed. Exit and return to main processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on (S2101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S2102), and then extracted from the fluctuation pattern command in the process of SX2002 in the command judgment process (see FIG. 32). The variation pattern type (one of the variations A to F and 2R variation) in the variation effect and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command in the process of S2005 are acquired from the RAM 223 (S2103).

  Then, the value of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b is read out, and the details are based on the value of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b, the variation pattern type and the stop type acquired from the processing of S2103, and the detail variation pattern determination table 222a. Change patterns are determined (S2104).

  Although the fluctuation pattern type notified from the main controller 110 by the fluctuation pattern command is defined only for the fluctuation time, one of various detailed fluctuation patterns prepared for the fluctuation time by this S2104 is 1 One variation pattern is selected, and the selected variation pattern is determined as a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed from now on.

  Here, in order to realize a pseudo-link given a role as shown in FIG. 8, a plurality of super reach is obtained as a detailed variation pattern that can be selected in this S2104 with respect to variation B (variation time 60 seconds). In addition to that, “3 times pseudo fluctuation + normal reach”, “3 time pseudo fluctuation + super reach”, “3 times pseudo fluctuation + special reach”, “5 times pseudo fluctuation + revival” Pseudo ream is prepared. In addition to a plurality of special reach as a detailed variation pattern that can be selected in this S2104 with respect to variation C (90 seconds of variation time), a pseudo-sequence by "4 times pseudo fluctuation + super reach", "4 times pseudo" Pseudo-series by "variation + special reach" and pseudo-series by "5 times pseudo variation + special reach" are prepared. Furthermore, for the fluctuation F (the fluctuation time 55 seconds), as the detailed fluctuation pattern selected in the step S2104, a pseudo-sequence of “5 times pseudo fluctuation + out” is prepared.

  Then, the detailed change pattern determination table 222a is set so that the degree of expectation that the jackpot will occur when the reach is established increases as the number of times of the pseudo change increases. Thereby, by using the detailed variation pattern determination table 222a, the detailed variation pattern is determined based on the value of the detail variation pattern determination counter 223b and the variation pattern type and the stop type acquired from the processing of S2103. While being able to realize the pseudo ream having the role shown in FIG. 8, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation of becoming a jackpot when the reach is established as the number of times of pseudo fluctuation increases.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the occurrence of such a pseudo link produces the following effects. That is, in the case where the fluctuation display by pseudo-link is performed, the more the number of the pseudo-changes performed during the one fluctuation display, the higher the expectation of becoming a big hit when reach is established. Similarly, the more the simulated change is performed during the one change display, the more the player can feel the possibility of becoming a big hit, and the player gets more fun with the game. be able to.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even after passing five times of pseudo-variation, which is the maximum number of times the pseudo-variation is repeated in the pseudo-series, there is a case where the case of being out occurs. As a result, even if the game is lost by lottery, the main control device 110 selects a long-time fluctuation pattern (in the present embodiment, the fluctuation F with a fluctuation time of 55 seconds) as the fluctuation pattern, and the sound lamp In the control device 113 and the display control device 114, during the long time (55 seconds) of the fluctuation time, it is possible to perform the fluctuation display of the pattern that the pseudo fluctuation is performed five times and the complete deviation is finally made. And the pseudo | simulation change frequency | count 5 times is also a pseudo | simulation run with the highest expectation which will be a big hit, when reach is formed. In other words, when a long fluctuation pattern (fluctuation F) of fluctuation time is selected at the time of departure, complete deviation occurs after passing the number of times of pseudo-variation (5 times) that the highest degree of expectation of becoming a big hit when reach is established. The player can continue to increase the sense of expectation that a reach will be established and a jackpot during the process leading to the detachment even if the player is completely disappointed in the pseudo ream. Therefore, even if the false reiteration is repeated, the player can continue playing the game happily by having a sense of anticipation as the jackpot.

  Moreover, even after passing through 5 times of pseudo fluctuation which is the maximum number of times of pseudo fluctuation being repeated in the pseudo ream, by configuring so that the case of becoming out may occur, the number of times that the pseudo fluctuation is repeatedly performed, It can be said that the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display can be prolonged. That is, in the case of the conventional pseudo-train, the probability of being out is lowered as the number of pseudo-variations increases, so when generating pseudo-trains in the case of out-of-order, most of them have two or three pseudo-variations. I needed to. Therefore, the fluctuation time was also about 30 seconds. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even after passing 5 times of pseudo-variation, which is the maximum number of times the pseudo-variation is repeated in the pseudo-series, it is configured such that a case of deviation may occur. The time can be increased to about 55 seconds. Moreover, as described above, in the case where the number of times of simulated fluctuation is five, the player is expected to go through five times of simulated fluctuation since the expectation that the jackpot is achieved is the highest when reach is established. Even if completely out of the way, in the process leading up to the outset, it is possible to increase reach and become a jackpot expectation by repeating the pseudo fluctuation, and it is not bothersome to approach the outset. Therefore, it is possible to make frequent occurrence of the fluctuation display by the pseudo ream which is dislocated after 5 times of the pseudo fluctuation, and for the purpose of making the player enjoy the game without having much concern for the small number of start winnings. One average fluctuation time can be lengthened. In other words, it is possible to increase the interest in the game without causing the player to get bored, and to increase the average fluctuation time of one time by making the pseudo ream frequently occur.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the type of reach performed when reach is established after five times of pseudo fluctuation is limited to a specific type of reach such as a special reach. Therefore, when the fifth simulated fluctuation is started, the player plays a game while having an expectation that the specific kind of reach (special reach) is established by the fifth simulated fluctuation. Can. In addition, since the specific type of reach is a high-expected special reach with the highest jackpot, the expectation for the establishment of the special reach further enhances the player's feeling. Therefore, even if the player loses the player completely as a result of the fifth pseudo fluctuation, the player is made to play the game while raising interest in the game without making the player bored Can.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at least reach is established when the pseudo fluctuation ends before the pseudo fluctuation number (5 times) having the highest degree of expectation at the time of reach establishment (5 times of the pseudo fluctuation number). And, it is configured to be a big hit with a predetermined probability. As a result, in the case where the number of times of pseudo fluctuation is 3 or 4 times, even if it is out, it is always a reach, so the player is expected to be a big hit until the finalized display is made in the variable display. You can keep feeling. Thus, the player's interest can be given to the end. In addition, when reach does not hold and comes off (complete out), it is only when the number of times of pseudo fluctuation is five, so it is a case where pseudo fluctuation ends when the number of times of pseudo fluctuation is 3 or 4 Also, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of becoming a big hit with a predetermined probability, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest to be known to the pseudo group even if the number of pseudo variations is small. In addition, in the case of complete disconnection in the pseudo run, the number of times of pseudo fluctuation is always five. Therefore, even in the case of complete disconnection in the pseudo link, it is possible to maximize the player's expectation that the reach will be established and the jackpot be achieved in the process leading to the disconnection. Therefore, the player can be entertained sufficiently even if the pseudo ream is completely removed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the “role” given the number of times of the pseudo fluctuation is five times does not become the reach as the final fluctuation pattern, and not only the “role” that the complete deviation is determined but also the final fluctuation pattern As the reach and not stop, but at the same time, stop pseudo off with a symbol, but also includes the "role" that will be re-changed and the jackpot is determined, so after 5 times of the pseudo-change, complete Even if the out-of-point symbol is displayed, the player can continue to have the expectation that re-variation may be performed and the jackpot may be determined, until the determination display is made. That is, even if the game is completely dislocated in the pseudo ream, since the player can continue to give the player a sense of anticipation for the jackpot until the symbol completely disapproved is displayed, the player is given an effect by the pseudo ream. Can be entertained to the end.

  Furthermore, in the pseudo link according to the present embodiment, as described above, the first and second pseudo fluctuations do not end the fluctuation or the reach is not established. As a result, in the pseudo-link, the pseudo-variation is always performed three or more times, and therefore it is possible to extend the average fluctuation time of one time. In addition, since it is possible to suppress or avoid the fact that the pseudo ream ends in the second pseudo fluctuation and becomes out of place as in the conventional case, the player is given the impression that the pseudo ream is merely an effect of earning time. We can suppress giving. Furthermore, in the case where an effect is given with storylines in the pseudo-variation that is repeatedly performed in the pseudo-series, an effect that allows the story to be understood among the first and second pseudo-variations in which the pseudo-variation is continued. By displaying, it is possible to execute an effect that is more understandable to the player.

  In the present embodiment, in the process of S2104, it is determined whether or not a continuous advance presentation effect has been determined by the process of S2009 of the command determination process (see FIG. 32) with respect to the change effect of determining the detailed change pattern in the process. Regardless of whether or not it is configured to be able to select the variation production by the pseudo-series, if it is determined to perform the continuous advance presentation effect for the variation production, it is configured so that the variation presentation by the pseudo-series is not selected It is also good. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the presentation becomes complicated for the player and it becomes difficult to understand by the combination of the fluctuation presentation by the pseudo ream and the continuous announcement presentation.

  When the detailed variation pattern is determined in the process of S2104, then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the determined detail variation pattern to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is displayed control device 114. It sets to transmit to (S2105).

  Further, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type acquired by the processing of S2103 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2106).

  The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display apparatus 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Start the display control of the fluctuation effect. In addition, when the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, it selects a stop symbol that matches the stop type, and when displaying the change effect started by the display change pattern command, the display Display the selected stop symbol.

  Then, according to the setting of the display fluctuation pattern command, the value of the holding ball number counter 223a is decreased by 1 in accordance with the consumption of the holding ball (that is, the setting of the fluctuation display corresponding to the holding ball is performed). (S2107) A display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the holding ball number indicated by the value of the holding ball number counter 223a after update is set (S2108). The display control device 114 executes a process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the number-of-held-balls number pattern according to the number of held balls indicated by the number-of-held-ball number display command. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of the balls held by counting the number of the held balls number symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is determined to perform continuous advance presentation effects by the processing of S2009 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 32) with respect to the fluctuation effects corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command set by the processing of S2105. (S2109), if it is determined to perform the continuous advance notice effect (S2109: Yes), the continuous notice command for notifying execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set to the display control device 114 (S2110) End this process and return to the main process. On the other hand, in the process of S2109, when it is not determined to perform the continuous advance presentation effect (S2109: No), the variation display process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the continuous notice command set by the process of S2110 is displayed additionally to the fluctuation effect according to the continuous notice effect mode determined by the process of S2009 of the command determination process (see FIG. 32). It includes continuous notice image types ("foam", "tamago", "chick", "chicken" and "chicken group"). When the display control device 114 receives the continuous notice command, it adds the continuous notice image of the type indicated by the continuous notice effect command to the fluctuation effect performed based on the display change pattern command received earlier, and generates the third symbol A process is performed to display on the display device 81.

  In the process of S2109, when the fluctuation effect corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command set by the process of S2105 is a pseudo-series, the process branches to S2108: No unconditionally and the setting process of the continuous notice command (S2110) ) May be skipped. Also by this, it is possible to suppress that the presentation becomes complicated for the player and it becomes difficult to understand by the combination of the fluctuation presentation by the pseudo ream and the continuous announcement presentation.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 34 to FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 (a) is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply circuit 315 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, it is necessary to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in the present embodiment. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2201), and the display control device 114 is made to be able to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch Here, the boot process (S2201) will be described with reference to FIG. 34 (b). FIG. 34B is a flowchart showing the boot processing (S2201) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are dedicated program ROMs (for example, the ROM 22 described in JP-A-2006-223598) as in the conventional gaming machine. Instead of storing the data, the character ROM 234 provided to store data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in The control program stored in the two-program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S2211). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2212). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2211.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S2212, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2212, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. Among the control programs, the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2213). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are transferred to the program storage area 233a, and the various data tables (display data table and transfer data table) described above are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

  Then, after performing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2214), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after this boot processing (see S2201 in FIG. 34) ends. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 34A) (S2215), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is ended.

  As described above, when the boot process (S2201) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a2, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 34B, the control program of the predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2211 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2211 executes the boot processing to be processed following the processing of S2212. It may be part of a boot program. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further instructs the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this transfer. The process of setting the pointer 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2213 to S2215 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2211 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this transfer. A process of setting the start address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S2211. And after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S2212, the processing of S2213 to S2215 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described where in the first program storage area 234d1 a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored among the boot programs. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process starts, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2213 to S2215 without performing the processes of S2211 and S2212. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Returning to FIG. 34 (a), the description will be continued. When the boot process ends, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2202). Specifically, the MPU 231 is initialized, and processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2203). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2203, then, the power on variation image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2204). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S2204, next, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2205). Thus, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 46A) described later. The resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 434 is executed so as to transfer (see S3002 of FIG. 46A).

  Also, the simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 434 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. Thus, during the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B), the simplified command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. Determination processing (see S2408 in FIG. 35B) and simplified display setting processing (see S2409 in FIG. 35B) are performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) to the first ball entrance 64, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110 If the display variation pattern command has been received via the device 113, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 15 (b) and 15 (c) is displayed immediately during the variation presentation period, Simple change effects can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, so it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S2205, interrupt permission is set (S2206), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the processing of S2206, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35A, the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 35A is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S 2301), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35 (b), the V interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 35 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list (see FIG. 21) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 35B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2401), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2401: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not the power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2402) is performed, and then a display setting process (S2403) is performed.

  In the command determination process (S2402), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the display data table corresponds to the set display data table. The transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233 f. Further, when the continuous notice command is stored, the continuous notice additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice image type is set in the additional data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, the continuous notice command, etc. are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, it quickly grasps the aspect of the fluctuation effects and the continuous advance presentation effects selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image so that the third symbol display device 81 displays. The details of the command interrupt process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 36 to 40.

  In the display setting process (S2403), based on the contents of the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table buffer 233e by the command determination process (S2402) or the like, the third symbol display device 81 The contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specifically identified. Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S2404). In this task processing, based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting processing (S2403) or the simple display setting processing (S2409), the image is constructed. While specifying the type of sprite (display object), various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc., are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2405). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233b is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 continuously receives a continuous notice command and a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2406). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S2404), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2405) 21 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2407). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by processing of S2407, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, time shorts hit, front and back outreach, reach before and after outreach) , And the stop type table corresponding to complete removal) are compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2401 that the simple image display flag is on (S2401: Yes), this means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. To display the power-on image shown in FIG. 15 on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S2408) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S2409) is executed, and the process of S2404 is performed. Transition to

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 36 to 40, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2402) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 36, it is first determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2501), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2501: No), The command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2403) that the new command has been processed in the on state is set to ON (S2502). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S2503).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a command for the number of holding balls for display among the unprocessed commands (S2504). If there is the command for the number of holding balls for display (S2504: Yes), the processing for the number of holding balls command processing Is executed (S2505), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 37 (a), the details of the holding ball number command process (S2505) will be described. FIG. 37 (a) is a flow chart showing the holding ball number command processing. This holding ball number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display holding ball number command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the holding ball number command processing, first, the new holding ball number command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S 2403) that the processing for the display holding ball number command in the ON state is turned on (S 2601), and then the display holding Holding ball number information included in the ball number command is acquired (S2602). If two or more display ball holding commands for display are stored in the command buffer area in the process of S2602, the ball holding number information is obtained from the display ball holding command stored last. Thereby, the latest holding ball number information can be acquired.

  Then, among the number determination flags provided for each number of holding balls, the number determination flag corresponding to the number of holding balls acquired in the process of S2602 is turned on, and the number determination flag corresponding to the other numbers of holding balls is turned off. Then (S2603), the process returns to the command determination process.

  Thereby, in the display setting process, when the new holding ball number command flag is on, the holding ball number pattern for the number of holding balls corresponding to the number determination flag set to ON by referring to the number determination flag Expand the reserved image data so that the third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 36, if it is determined in the process of S2504 that there is no display reserved ball number command (S2504: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display confirmation command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display confirmation command (S2506: Yes), then the confirmation command processing is executed (S2507), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 37 (b), details of the confirmation command process (S2507) will be described. FIG. 37 (b) is a flowchart showing the confirmation command process. This confirmation command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display confirmation command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the confirmation command process (S2507), the confirmation command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2403) that the display confirmation command has been received in the ON state is set to ON (S2611), and this process is ended and command determination is performed. Return to processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, the state of the confirmation command flag is monitored, and when the flag is turned on, the display setting process is performed so that the display of the confirmation display effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. Run. In addition, when the setting of the display of the change effect is processed, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the confirmation command flag is not turned on even after the effect time set in the change effect has elapsed. Execute the display setting process to make it

  Returning to FIG. 36, if it is determined in the process of S2506 that there is no display confirmation command (S2506: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display demo command among the unprocessed commands ( S2508) If there is a display demo command (S2508: Yes), a demo command process is executed (S2509), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the demonstration command processing (S2509) will be described with reference to FIG. 37 (c). FIG. 37 (c) is a flowchart showing demo command processing. The demo command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display demo command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the demonstration command process (S2509), first, a demonstration display data table corresponding to demonstration effect is selected from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2621). Then, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the additional data table buffer 233e, and in the demonstration display data table, it is necessary to newly transfer the image data necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Since the drawing of the image is specified so as not to occur, the corresponding transfer data table is not prepared in the data table storage area 233b, so null data is also written to the transfer data table buffer 233f to clear its contents (S2622) ).

  Next, the time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the clock counter 233i (S2623), and the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S2624). Then, the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 in the on state is set to be on, and that the final display effect is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 in the on state. The finalized display flag shown is set to OFF, and the finalized display flag indicating that the finalized display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to OFF (S2625), the demo command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing this demo command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233g initialized by the process of S2624, from the demonstration display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2621 The third graphic display device 81 extracts the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the display setting process, the time of the demonstration effect defined in the demonstration display data table is measured using the clock counter 233i in which the time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set by the process of S2623, and the process of S2625 is performed. If it is judged that the demonstration effect in the display data table for demonstration is finished by the clocking of the display setting control clocking counter 233i based on the state of the demonstration display flag and the final display flag set by the following, the effect to be displayed next As a, it controls so that a demonstration effect is displayed again.

  Returning to FIG. 36, if it is determined in the process of S2508 that there is no display demo command (S2508: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands. (S2510) If there is a display variation pattern command (S2510: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S2511), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 38A, details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S2511) will be described. FIG. 38 (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. The variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing, first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and displayed. It is set in the data table buffer 233d (S2631).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2631, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, variation display data corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time The table is set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Temporarily, if the display data table for fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having the fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is main control When instructed by the device 110, while the variation design according to the set display data table for variation is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the confirmation command from the main control device 110 (display determination command ) And the third symbol in motion is suddenly stopped and displayed, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the display data table for variation corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the display data table is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having the fluctuation time is instructed by main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to display data table buffer 233d is ended, the confirmation command from main controller 110 Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the restart effect is displayed until the (display determination command) is received, the player changes the restart effect. Visualize as part of the effect and watch the third symbol variation in the third symbol display device 81 without discomfort until the stop display of the third symbol is determined You can kick it.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2631 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233f (S2632). Then, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the additional data table buffer 233e (S2633).

  After that, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each of the fluctuation display data tables corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2631 is turned on, and others The data table determination flag corresponding to the variable display data table is set to OFF (S2634). In the display setting process, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern corresponds to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S 2634. It can be judged. Then, in the display setting process, it is determined whether there is any contradiction between the set fluctuation pattern of the display data table for change and the stop symbol set by the display stop type command received later, and if there is a contradiction As will be described later, the display data table corresponding to the special variation is set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2631, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233i (S2635), The pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S2636). Then, the confirmation command flag, the demonstration display flag, and the confirmation display flag are all set to OFF (S2637), and the restart timer counter used in the display setting process is initialized to 0 (S2638), and the fluctuation pattern command is changed. End, and return to the command determination process.

  By executing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, the display data table for variation set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2631 while updating the pointer 233g initialized by the process of S2636. The drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g are extracted from the data, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time the transfer data table buffer is processed by the processing of S263. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233g is extracted from the transfer data table set to 233f, and the image data of the sprite required in the set display data table for variation is previously extracted from the character ROM 234 for normal use. Bidet To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the RAM 236, controls the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233i in which the fluctuation time data is set by the process of S2635, and the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table If it is determined that the command has been completed, the final display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the final command (display command for display) from the main control unit 110 is received, and finalized within a predetermined time after the end of the variable performance If the command (display determination command) can not be received, the setting of the display is controlled to display the restart effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, if both the display confirmation command and the display fluctuation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, priority is given to the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command. Since the fluctuation effect accompanying the fluctuation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to give priority to the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command. On the other hand, in the present command determination process, since the determination of the presence or absence of the display confirmation command is performed first, the confirmation command process, which is the process corresponding to the display confirmation command, is always executed first. The process corresponding to the variable pattern command for command is executed later, and as in the process of S2637, the finalized command flag set by the finalized command for display can be set to "off" by overwriting. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display confirmation command, and the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed with priority given to the variation effect associated with the display variation pattern command.

  Similarly, when both the display demo command and the display fluctuation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the process corresponding to the display demo command is prioritized, the display Since the fluctuation effect accompanying the fluctuation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to give priority to the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command. On the other hand, in this command determination processing, since the determination of the presence / absence of the display demo command is performed first, the demo command processing which is processing corresponding to the display demo command is always executed first, while the display The process corresponding to the for-use variation pattern command is executed later, and the demonstration display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the display demo command is rewritten to the variation display data table by overwriting as in the process of S2631. Can. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display demo command, and the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed by giving priority to variation effects associated with the display variation pattern command.

  Returning to FIG. 36, if it is determined in the process of S2510 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2510: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display suspension type command among the unprocessed commands (S2512) If there is a display variation type command (S2511: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2513), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2513) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38B is a flowchart showing the stop type command process. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the fluctuation type command processing, first, the stop corresponding to the stop type information (15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, time junior high hit, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, reach completely out) indicated by the display stop type command The type table is determined (S2641), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time V interrupt processing (see FIG. 35B) is executed, and the third symbol The stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the display device 81 is finally set (S2642).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2642 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is It is set to off (S2643).

  Here, as described above, in the display data table for variation, type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation based on the data table The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2642 is described as the. In the above-described task processing (S2404), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2642 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2643, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  After the processing of S2643, next, the comparison flag is turned on (S2644), this type-of-stop command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing. By turning on this comparison flag, in the display setting process, there is no contradiction between the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display table set by the fluctuation pattern command setting process described above and the stop symbol set by the process of S2642. If there is a contradiction, as described later, the display data table corresponding to the special variation is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  It should be noted that, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may also be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2641, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the process of S2642.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is set, the stop symbol of the jackpot will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is actually dismounted, and the player The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 may be mistaken as a jackpot, and there is a possibility that the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced. On the other hand, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete removal is set as in the present embodiment, and in the case of a large hit, the complete removal stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in practice. Also, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the jackpot state, it is possible to please the player.

  Returning to FIG. 36, if it is determined in the process of S2512 that there is no display type command for suspension (S2512: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a continuous notice command among the unprocessed commands ( S2514) If there is a continuous notice command (S2514: Yes), the continuous notice command processing is executed (S2515), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 39A, the details of the continuous advance notice command process (S2515) will be described. FIG. 39 (a) is a flowchart showing continuous notice command processing. The continuous notice command process is to execute a process corresponding to the continuous notice command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the continuous advance notice command processing, first, a new continuous advance notice command flag for notifying the transfer setting process (S2405) that the continuous advance notice command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2651). Next, a continuous preview additional data table corresponding to a continuous preview image type (one of "bubble", "tamago", "chick", "chicken" and "chicken group") indicated by the continuous preview command is determined. Then, the determined continuous preview additional data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the additional data table buffer 233e.

  Thereby, in the display setting process, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is continuously performed corresponding to the continuous data addition data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e by the process of S2652. The display content of the image for the next one frame in the third symbol display device 81 is specified so that the advance notice effect is additionally displayed.

  Thereafter, among the continuous advance notice determination flags provided for each continuous advance notice image type, the continuous advance notice determination flag corresponding to the continuous advance notice image type included in the continuous advance notice command is turned on, and the continuation corresponding to other continuous advance notice image types The advance notice determination flag is set to off (S2653), and the continuous advance notice command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the transfer setting process, when it is detected that the new continuous notice command flag set in the process of S2651 is turned on, it is determined that a predetermined continuous notice additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 233e by the continuous notice command process. A determination is made, and a continuous notice type corresponding to the continuous notice additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233e is specified from the continuous notice determination flag set by the process of S2653. Then, it instructs the image controller 237 to transfer image data necessary to display the specified successive notice type.

  Returning to FIG. 36, if it is determined in the process of S2514 that there is no continuous advance notice command (S2514: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2516) ), If there is a rear surface image change command (S2516: Yes), the rear surface image change command processing is executed (S2517), and the process returns to the processing of S2501.

  Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S2517) will be described with reference to FIG. 39 (b). FIG. 39 (b) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear surface image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear surface image change command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the rear surface image change command processing, first, the rear surface image change flag for notifying the transfer setting processing (S2405) of the change of the rear surface image accompanying the reception of the rear surface image change command in the on state is set on (S2661). Then, among the back surface image determination flags provided for each of the back surface image types (back surfaces A to C), the back surface image determination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on The rear image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S2662), the rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S2661 is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S2662. Then, if the identified back image type is the back surface B or back surface C, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 Since the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, the transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed by the back surface type of the back image defined in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S2662 The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, and further, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored For the video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should not be two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously changed to the back image It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2662, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface image change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Returning to FIG. 36, when it is determined in the process of S2516 that there is no rear image change command (S2516: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a frame button operation command among the unprocessed commands ( S2518) If there is a frame button operation command (S2518: Yes), a frame button operation command process is executed (S2519), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the frame button operation command processing (S2519) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 (a) is a flowchart showing frame button operation command processing. The frame button operation command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the frame button operation command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the frame button operation command, a frame button operation flag indicating that the frame button has been operated in the on state is set to on (S2671), this process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, the frame button is operated while the super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the variation display data table based on the frame button operation flag set in the process of S2671. Is detected, the processing of updating the type of super reach to be displayed later is executed. Thereby, the player can be made to select a desired super reach effect.

  Returning to FIG. 36, if it is determined in the process of S2518 that there is no frame button operation command (S2518: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2520) If there is an error command (S2520: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2521), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the error command process (S 2521) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. The error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S2681). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S2682). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2681, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S2682, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S2682, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Returning to FIG. 36, if it is determined in the process of S2520 that there is no error command (S2520: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2522), and the process returns to S2501.

  In the process of S2501 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is judged again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes ), The processing of S2502 to S2522 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2501 to S2522 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2501 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

  In the simplified command determination process (S2408) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simplified command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 15 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display table determination command, display variation pattern Only the command and the display stop type command are extracted, and the processing corresponding to each command is determined command processing (see FIG. 37 (b)), fluctuation pattern command processing (refer to FIG. 38 (a)), and stop type The command processing (see FIG. 38C) is executed, and other commands are discarded without performing the processing corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 38A) executed in this case, in the processing of S2631, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image upon power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image necessary for the setting are stored in the power-on main motion image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2632, the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233b, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2403) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIGS. 41 and 42 are flowcharts showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 41, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S2701), and if the new command flag is not on, ie, off (S2701: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the process of S2702 to S2710 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2711. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S2701: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination processing to be executed earlier, and the new command flag is set to off (S2702). The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of

  In the process of S2703, it is determined whether or not the new holding ball count command flag is on (S2703), and if the new holding ball count command flag is on (S2703: Yes), it is displayed in the previous command determination process It is determined that the holding ball number command has been processed, and a holding image setting process is executed (S2704).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 43 (a), the details of the hold image setting process will be described. FIG. 43 (a) is a flowchart showing the hold image setting process. This holding image setting process causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the holding ball number design for the holding ball number notified from the voice lamp control device 113 in accordance with the processing of the display holding ball number command. It is a process for expanding image data.

  In the holding image setting process, first, the number determination flag is referred to, and the number of holding balls number pattern for the number of holding balls corresponding to the number determination flag set to ON is the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 4) The hold image data to be displayed on the page is expanded (S2751). In task processing, based on the expanded reserved image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the reserved image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various required parameters.

  In the holding image setting process, after the process of S2751, the new holding ball number command is set to OFF (S2752), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Returning to FIG. 41, after the holding image setting process (S3104) or in the process of S2703, if it is determined that the new holding ball number command flag is not on, ie, off (S2703: No), then It is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S2705). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S2705: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S2706).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 (b) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S2761).

  In task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various required parameters.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S2761, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S2762), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Referring back to FIG. 41, after the warning image setting process (S2706) or in the process of S2705, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off (S2705: No), then the frame button It is determined whether the operation flag is on (S2707). Then, if the frame button operation flag is on (S2707: Yes), the frame button operation process is executed (S2708).

  Here, the details of the frame button operation process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 (b) is a flowchart showing frame button operation processing. In this process, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player while displaying the selection screen for selecting the display mode of the super reach on the third symbol display device 81, the super reach of the display should be displayed according to the operation. It is a process for selecting an aspect.

  In the frame button operation process, first, after setting the frame button operation flag to OFF (S2771), it is determined whether or not the super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2772). This super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the display data table for variation set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the variation set in the V interruption process executed last time If drawing of a sprite for the super reach selection screen is instructed to the image controller 237 based on the display data table, it is determined that the super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The super reach selection screen is displayed only when a normal super reach is instructed as a detailed change pattern, and is not displayed when the super reach is established in the pseudo-train.

  Then, if it is determined in the process of S2772 that the super reach selection screen is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2772: No), the frame button operation process is ended and the process returns to the display setting process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a result of the processing of S2772 (S2772: Yes), the super reach type flag provided for each display mode of super reach Among them, the super reach type flag is updated so that only the super reach type flag corresponding to one display mode is turned on and the other super reach type flags are set to off according to a predetermined order (S2773), Return to the display setting process.

  In this embodiment, when defining the display of the super reach of the aspect selected by the player in the display data table for variation, it defines the drawing content corresponding to the display mode of the respective super reach for each address. In the display setting process, when the contents of the display data table are expanded in the process of S2712 described later, only the drawing contents corresponding to the display mode of the super reach in which the super reach type flag is turned on are extracted. As a result, in the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) corresponding to the display mode of the selected super reach is specified, and it is necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle for each sprite. Since various parameters are set, the super reach effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the selected display mode.

  Referring back to FIG. 41, after the frame button operation process (S2708) or in the process of S2707, if it is determined that the frame button operation flag is not on, that is, off (S2707: No), then the comparison is made. It is determined whether the flag is on (S2709). Then, if the comparison flag is on (S2709: Yes), the comparison process is executed (S2710).

  Here, the details of the comparison processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing comparison processing. This process is changed when the display data table for variation set in the display data table buffer 233 d contradicts the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command based on the display variation pattern command. In order to change the effect into a special change effect that changes and displays the third symbol at high speed until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 is received. Processing.

  In the comparison process, first, among the data table determination flags, the data table determination flag set in the on state is specified, and from the specified data table determination flag, the variable data stored in the display data table buffer 233b The type of display data table is specified (S2781). Next, among the stop symbol determination flags, the stop symbol determination flag set in the on state is specified, and the set stop symbol is specified from the specified stop symbol determination flag (S2782).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the type of the variation display data table identified by the process of S2781 matches the stop symbol identified by the process of S2782 (S2783). As described above, the display data table for variation is prepared for each variation pattern, and each variation pattern is used for outliers, 15R fixed jackpot, hourly large jackpot sharing, 15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, ··and so on. Therefore, although the process of S2783 corresponds to the fluctuation pattern for deviation, for example, when the stop design is set to the big hit design, it is determined that these do not match. .

  If it is determined in step S2783 that they match (S2783: YES), the process proceeds to step S2788, and after setting the comparison flag to OFF (S2788), the process returns to the display setting process. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S2783: No), first, the special variation display data table in which the special variation is specified is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table Each content is cleared by writing Null data to the buffer 233 f (S 2784).

  Next, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the special stop symbol (for example, symbols displayed as “3” “4” “1” from the left row) is turned on and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to other stop symbols Is set to OFF (S2785), and further, time data corresponding to the special variation production time is set in the clock counter 233i (S2786). In addition, as for special fluctuation production, as mentioned above, until it receives the decision command (confirmation command for display) transmitted from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed The display time is set to a long time (for example, 3 minutes) because it is displayed. Therefore, 3 minutes (180,000 milliseconds) ÷ 20 milliseconds = 9000 are set in the time counter 233i as time data corresponding to the special variation production time.

  Then, the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S2787), the comparison flag is set to OFF (S2788), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  As described above, when the display data table for variation set in the display data table buffer 233 d is inconsistent with the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display based on the display variation pattern command, special processing is performed. Since the display data table for variation is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the third symbol display device 81 displays a special variation effect in which the third symbol continues to fluctuate at high speed. Then, since the special stop symbol is set as the stop symbol, when the confirmation command (display determination command) transmitted from the main control device 110 through the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the special symbol Can be displayed on the third symbol display 281.

  Here, when the fluctuation effect pattern instructed by the main controller 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 does not match the stop symbol to be displayed at the time of the stop display of the fluctuation effect, the main control device in the display control device 114 There is a possibility that it is not possible to correctly reflect the result of the lottery performed at 110 and to perform the fluctuation effect or the fixed display effect. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, in such a case, special variation effects are performed, and after the variation display, a special stop symbol indicating a special detachment is finalized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so the main control device Even if the result of the lottery at 110 is out, it is possible to prevent the final display effect of the big hit being performed on the third symbol display device 81 by mistake. In addition, even if the special stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, if the lottery result in the main control unit 110 is a big hit, the gaming state in the actual pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the special gaming state, so The player can continue playing with peace of mind. Furthermore, by setting the finalized display as a special stop symbol, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state even if the finalized display is out, Even if the finalized display is out, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state, so that the player can be prevented from feeling uneasy.

  Referring back to FIG. 41, after the comparison process (S2708) or in the process of S2709, if it is determined that the comparison flag is not on, ie, off (S2709: No), then the process proceeds to the process of S2711. Do.

  In S2711, pointer update processing is executed (S2711). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process is performed based on the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233 d, the additional data table buffer 233 e, and the transfer data table buffer 233 f. This is processing for updating the pointer 233g that designates an address to which transfer data information of target image data is to be acquired.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233g (S2791). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 g is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233e, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so that each address is sequentially from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233g is updated by the process of S2791, then in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233g is End information or not (S2792). As a result, if it is the End information (S2792: Yes), it means that the pointer 233g has been updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d past the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table (S2793), and the demonstration display data table or the restart display data If it is a table (S2793: Yes), the pointer 233g is set to 1 (S2794), and it corresponds to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is set in the clock counter 233i (S2795), and the process proceeds to the process of S2797. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table, so the third symbol display device 81 repeats the demonstration effect or the restart effect. It can be displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2793 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is neither a demonstration display data table nor a restart display data table (S2793: No), the pointer 233g is selected. The value is decremented by 1 (S2796), and the process proceeds to S2797. Thus, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table and the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, for example, the display data table for variation and the finalized display data table are set. , Because the drawing contents of the previous address at which the End information is described is always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed with the last image defined in the display data table being stopped. be able to.

  If it is determined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d that the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233g after the update by the process of S2791 is not the end information, as a result of the process of S2792, S2793 to S2795 And skip to step S2797.

  In the process of S2797, it is determined whether or not the finalized command flag is on (S2797), and if the finalized command flag is not on but is off (S2797: No), the pointer updating process is ended and display setting is performed. Return to processing. On the other hand, if the determination command flag is on (S2797: Yes), this means that the determination command (display determination command) has been received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, so the display data table buffer Set the value of pointer 233g to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address where the end information is stored in the display data buffer set to 233d (S2798), and set the value of the clock counter to 1 Then, the process returns to the display setting process (S2799). Thereby, when the confirmation command is received, in the display setting process, the drawing contents defined at the end of the set display data table can be expanded, and the start of the definite display effect can be controlled.

  Referring back to FIG. 41, after the pointer update process, the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d and the additional data table buffer 233 e are of the address indicated by the pointer 233 g updated by the pointer update process. The drawing contents are expanded (S2712). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S2712 together with the reserved image and warning image expanded in advance, and for each sprite It determines various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle. If null data is described in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there is no sprite to be added. In addition, when the additional data table buffer 233e is cleared with null data, null data is always expanded from the additional data table buffer 233e.

  Next, the value of the clock counter g is decremented by 1 (S2713), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233i after subtraction is 0 or less (S2714). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233i is 1 or more (S2714: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interruption process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233i is 0 or less (S2714: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the display data table for variation is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the confirmation command (display confirmation command from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 114 is made according to the end of the effect. Is to be transmitted, so in the subsequent processing of S2715, it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation command flag is on (S2715).

  As a result, if the determination command flag is on (S2715: Yes), this means that the determination command (display determination command) has been received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 114, so the determination is made first The display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the null data is written in the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table buffer 233f, respectively, to clear those contents (S2716). Next, time data corresponding to the presentation time of the finalized display is set in the clock counter 233i (S2717), and the value of the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S2718). Then, the set command flag is set to OFF (S2719), and then the set display flag indicating that the set display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S2720), and the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are unchanged as the work RAM 233 Copy to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in (S2721), and return to the V interrupt processing.

  As a result, when the display data table for variation is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final command from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 is confirmed according to the end of the effect. When the command is received, the drawing content can be set such that the final display effect of the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 281 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S2721 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fluctuation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is described until a predetermined time passes since the start of. In the task processing (S2404), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S2721, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmed command flag is not on but off in the process of S2715 (S2715: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2722 shown in FIG. 42, and it is determined whether the confirmed display flag is on (S2722). ). Then, if the finalized display flag is on (S2722: Yes), the result of the determination in the process of S2714 (S2714: Yes) means that the finalized display effect has ended, so the finalized display flag is set to OFF. After that (S2723), the display data table for demonstration is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2724), and then the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the data display is set in the clock counter 233i (S2725). Then, the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S2726), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S2727), and the V interruption processing is ended.

  As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display demonstration effect command indicating the start of the demonstration effect is not received by the time the finalized display effect ends, automatically, The drawing contents can be set so that the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the branch condition of S2722: Yes is satisfied when the fixed display effect is performed. In this case, the contents of the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table buffer 233f are both processed by the process of S2716. It has been cleared. Therefore, in the process of S2724, the process of clearing those data table buffers is omitted. Thus, the processing load on the MPU 231 can be reduced.

  In the process of S2722, if the finalized display flag is not on but is off (S2722: No), it is then determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S2728). Then, if the demonstration display flag is on (S2728: Yes), the result of the judgment in the process of S2714 (S2714: Yes) means that the demonstration effect has ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is, and V Return to interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2728, if the demonstration display flag is not on but is off (S2728: No), the result of the determination in the process of S2714 (S2714: Yes) means that the fluctuation effect has ended. Therefore, if the confirmation command is not received even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the end of the fluctuation production, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation production is set in the display data table buffer 233d to start the restart effect. At the same time, 1 is added to the restart timer counter initialized to 0 (S2729), and it is determined whether the value of the restart timer counter after addition has reached a predetermined value (S2730).

  Then, if the restart timer counter does not have the predetermined value (S2730: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interruption process. If the restart timer counter has a predetermined value (S2730: Yes), the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and null data is stored in the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table buffer 233f, respectively. Are written to clear their contents (S2731). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time of the restart effect is set in the clock counter 233i (S2732), and further, the value of the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S2733), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, in the display control device, the confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 even if a predetermined time has passed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed along with the end of the fluctuation effect When the display confirmation command is not received, the drawing content can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as described above, since the restart effect is an effect of displaying the image in which the third symbol is vibrated on the third symbol display device 81, the player can display the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. When it is visually recognized that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped and displayed, it can be recognized that the stopped symbol is not determined at that time.

  Incidentally, after the last drawing content defined by the restart display data table is expanded, the drawing content is expanded again from the top of the restart display data table by the above-described pointer update processing. Therefore, the restart effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the display confirmation command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 or the new display variation pattern command is received. Here, the restart effect is to display on the third symbol display device 81 in a mode in which the third symbol is vibrated (rocked) around the predetermined position, and in the restart display data table, the third symbol is displayed. It defines only the drawing contents necessary to make it swing and display at least once. Then, by repeatedly developing the drawing content from the top of the restart display data table, a restart effect in which the third symbol is repeatedly vibrated is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this way, by making the restart effect the effect of causing the third symbol display device 81 to vibrate and display the third symbol, the restart display data table causes the third symbol to rock at least once. Since it is sufficient to store only the drawing contents necessary for displaying, the capacity required for storing the restart display data table can be reduced.

  When the display confirmation command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2716 shown in FIG. 44 is performed, and the display data table buffer is displayed. A finalized display data table is set in 233 d. As a result, even when the restart effect is being performed, the stop display of the third symbol is performed with the stop symbol indicated by the stop symbol determination flag in accordance with the reception of the display confirmation command, and the confirmation display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

  When the display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the start display data table, the process of S2631 of FIG. 38A is performed, and the display data is displayed. A variation display data table is set in the table buffer 233 d, and variation effects are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when the display demonstration command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the start display data table, the processing of S2621 of FIG. 37 (c) is performed, and the display data table is displayed. In the buffer 233 d, a demonstration display data table is set, and a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the restart effect, the confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 to be originally received is not received even if a predetermined time has passed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed with the end of the fluctuation effect. Since the effect is displayed in the case, there is a possibility that the confirmation command may not be received while the restart effect is displayed due to the influence of noise, a malfunction or the like. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if the display variation pattern command and the display demo command are received during the restart effect, the effect corresponding to the command can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, Various effects in the third symbol display device 81 can be performed in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the simplified display setting process (S2409) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interruption process (see FIG. 35B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, when a decision command (display decision command) is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image is over, For a predetermined time, it was defined that one image (one of FIGS. 15 (b) and (c)) of the power-on fluctuation image according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is stopped and displayed A process of setting the display data table in the display data table buffer 233i is performed. Also, when the reception of the confirmation command (display confirmation command) to be received from the main control device 110 through the audio lamp control device 113 is not recognized after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image is finished. A process of setting a display data table which specifies that the fluctuation effect of the power-on time fluctuation image is restarted as it is is set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Also, in the comparison process, the fluctuation pattern instructed by the display fluctuation pattern command is compared with the stop type instructed by the display stop type, and if these do not match, the stop symbol is removed as the stop symbol (FIG. c) Set the reference).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2405) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 46 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3001). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3001: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3002) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the result of the process of S3001 is that the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3001: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is a resident video from the character ROM 234 It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S2603), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46B, the resident image transfer setting process (S3002), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 46 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3002).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S3101), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3101: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer processing of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3102). In this process of S3102, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S3102 (S3102: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3102: Yes), the process proceeds to S3103. Also, as a result of the process of S3101, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3101: No), the process proceeds to S3103.

  In the process of S3103, it is determined whether all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3103), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3103: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3104), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. In the transfer data information, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the process of S3103, if all resident target image data has been transferred (S3103: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3105), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 36B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 36B) and the simple display setting process (see S2409 in FIG. 36B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 36 to 40) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 41 to 45) are performed, drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 47) (see S3001: No in FIG. 46A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 282.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a normal image transfer setting process (S3003) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3003).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f, the pointer 233g updated by the pointer update process (S2711) of the display setting process (S2403) executed earlier is used. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3201). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S3202), and if it is transfer data information (S3202: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3203) Further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3204), and the process proceeds to S3205.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S3202 (S3202: No), the process of S3203 and S3204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3205. In the process of S3205, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of the image data is completed (S3205), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S3205: Yes), it is further determined based on the transfer instruction whether transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed (S3206).

  In the process of S3206, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S3206 (S3206: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3206: Yes), the process proceeds to S3207. Also, as a result of the process of S3205, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3205: No), the process proceeds to S3207.

  In the process of S3207, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3207). If the transfer start flag is on (S3207: Yes), the image data to be transferred start exists, so the transfer start flag Is turned off (S3208), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3203 is set as the transfer target image, and then the process proceeds to S3216. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on and is off (S3207: No), it is then determined whether a new continuous notice command flag is on (S3209).

  Then, if the new continuous notice command flag is on (S3209: Yes), it means that the continuous notice command is processed and the continuous notice additional data table for the continuous notice effect is set in the additional data table buffer 733c. Therefore, after setting the new continuous notice command flag to OFF (S3210), image data of the continuous notice image corresponding to the continuous notice determination flag in the ON state among the continuous notice determination flags provided for each continuous notice image type. The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM 236 for normal use) are specified (S3211). With the image data of the sprite indicated by the information as the transfer target image The process proceeds to S3216.

  In the process of S3209, if the new continuous notice command flag is not on but is off (S3209: No), it is then determined whether the rear image change flag is on (S3212). Then, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S3212: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3212: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S3213), the back image provided for each back image type The start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state is stored among the determination flags, and transfer The start address of the previous (video RAM for normal use 236) is specified (S3214), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the specified various information is set as the transfer target image, and the process proceeds to the process of S3216.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3214, if the back image determination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is ended as it is.

  In the process of S3216, it is determined whether the transfer target image is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3216). The determination in the process of S3216 is performed by referring to the stored image determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image is read from the storage image determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is stored in the normal video RAM 236. If the stored state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Then, if the transfer target image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3216 (S3216: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3216 (S3216: Yes), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image is set (S3217). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information described in the drawing list. The image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3217, the stored image determination flag 233j is updated (S3218), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image determination flag 233 j sets the stored state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image to “on”, and in the sub area of the same image storage area 236 a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored to "off".

  As described above, by executing the normal-use image transfer process, the process for the continuous advance notice command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and corresponds to the continuous advance notice image indicated by the continuous advance notice command. When the additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 233e, the image data of the continuous notice image used in the additional data table can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used for the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers data to the image controller 237 according to transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233g of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. Since the transfer instruction of the target image is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. .

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2406) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2404) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) From the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the drawing list shown in FIG. 21 is generated (S3301). That is, in the process of S3301, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2404), the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite. Then, with respect to the specified storage RAM type and address, the necessary parameters for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing object buffer information specified by the drawing object buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3302). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 281 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing processing and the display processing are processed simultaneously and in parallel. Can.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3302, the drawing object buffer flag 233k is updated (S3303). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233 k is updated by inverting the value, that is, setting it to “1” when the value is “0”, and “0” if it is “1” To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 35) is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the following “role” is given to each number of times of pseudo fluctuation performed during one fluctuation display in the pseudo ream: ing. First, pseudo-variation is always performed three or more times. That is, the fluctuation does not end at the first and second pseudo fluctuation and the reach is not established, and the pseudo link always continues. And, if the pseudo change performed during one change display is performed three times, that is, the number of times of the pseudo change “3 times”, reach (normal reach, super reach, or special reach) as the final change pattern Is given a "role" that the probability of becoming a jackpot is high. In the case where the pseudo fluctuation performed during one fluctuation display is performed four times, that is, in the case of the pseudo fluctuation number “four times”, the final fluctuation pattern is at least super reach (that is, super reach or special reach). Is determined, and a “role” is given such that the probability of becoming a jackpot is higher than in the case of the “three times” pseudo fluctuation number.

  In addition, in the case where the pseudo fluctuation performed during one fluctuation display is performed five times, that is, in the case of the pseudo fluctuation number “five times”, the following three “roles” are given. The first is a "role" that is determined to be a special reach as a final change pattern and to be a jackpot. The second is the "role" in which the complete deviation is determined without reaching the reach as the final change pattern. The third is a "role" in which the final fluctuation pattern is not reached, but at the same time, it is pseudo-stopped with an out-of-hand pattern, but then re-variation is performed and the jackpot is determined. That is, if the pseudo fluctuation is performed 5 times during the 1 fluctuation display, in the 5th pseudo fluctuation, whether the special reach is established and the jackpot is determined, or the complete deviation is determined without the reach being established Or, re-variation is performed after the false stop of the outfall, and the jackpot is determined.

  And, in the first embodiment, in order to realize the pseudo-link given such a role, a plurality of detailed fluctuation patterns that can be selected in S2104 with respect to the fluctuation B (the fluctuation time of 60 seconds) In addition to super reach, pseudo link by "3 times pseudo fluctuation + normal reach", pseudo link by "3 times pseudo fluctuation + super reach", pseudo link by "3 times pseudo fluctuation + special reach", "5 times pseudo fluctuation + A pseudo reunion by revival is prepared. In addition to a plurality of special reach as a detailed variation pattern that can be selected in this S2104 with respect to variation C (90 seconds of variation time), a pseudo-sequence by "4 times pseudo fluctuation + super reach", "4 times pseudo" Pseudo-series by "variation + special reach" and pseudo-series by "5 times pseudo variation + special reach" are prepared. Furthermore, for the fluctuation F (the fluctuation time 55 seconds), as the detailed fluctuation pattern selected in the step S2104, a pseudo-sequence of “5 times pseudo fluctuation + out” is prepared.

  Then, the detailed change pattern determination table 222a is set so that the degree of expectation that the jackpot will occur when the reach is established increases as the number of times of the pseudo change increases. Thereby, by using the detailed variation pattern determination table 222a, the detailed variation pattern is determined based on the value of the detail variation pattern determination counter 223b and the variation pattern type and the stop type acquired from the processing of S2103. While being able to realize the pseudo ream having the role shown in FIG. 8, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation of becoming a jackpot when the reach is established as the number of times of pseudo fluctuation increases.

  Therefore, in the first embodiment, the occurrence of such a pseudo ream produces the following effects. That is, in the case where the fluctuation display by pseudo-link is performed, the more the number of the pseudo-changes performed during the one fluctuation display, the higher the expectation of becoming a big hit when reach is established. Similarly, the more the simulated change is performed during the one change display, the more the player can feel the possibility of becoming a big hit, and the player gets more fun with the game. be able to.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even after passing five times of pseudo-variation, which is the maximum number of times the pseudo-variation is repeated in the pseudo-series, there is a case where the case of being out occurs. As a result, even if the game is lost by lottery, the main control device 110 selects a long-time fluctuation pattern (in the present embodiment, the fluctuation F with a fluctuation time of 55 seconds) as the fluctuation pattern, and the sound lamp In the control device 113 and the display control device 114, during the long time (55 seconds) of the fluctuation time, it is possible to perform the fluctuation display of the pattern that the pseudo fluctuation is performed five times and the complete deviation is finally made. And the pseudo | simulation change frequency | count 5 times is also a pseudo | simulation run with the highest expectation which will be a big hit, when reach is formed. In other words, when a long fluctuation pattern (fluctuation F) of fluctuation time is selected at the time of departure, complete deviation occurs after passing the number of times of pseudo-variation (5 times) that the highest degree of expectation of becoming a big hit when reach is established. The player can continue to increase the sense of expectation that a reach will be established and a jackpot during the process leading to the detachment even if the player is completely disappointed in the pseudo ream. Therefore, even if the false reiteration is repeated, the player can continue playing the game happily by having a sense of anticipation as the jackpot.

  Moreover, even after passing through 5 times of pseudo fluctuation which is the maximum number of times of pseudo fluctuation being repeated in the pseudo ream, by configuring so that the case of becoming out may occur, the number of times that the pseudo fluctuation is repeatedly performed, It can be said that the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display can be prolonged. That is, in the case of the conventional pseudo-train, the probability of being out is lowered as the number of pseudo-variations increases, so when generating pseudo-trains in the case of out-of-order, most of them have two or three pseudo-variations. I needed to. Therefore, the fluctuation time was also about 30 seconds. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even after passing 5 times of pseudo-variation, which is the maximum number of times the pseudo-variation is repeated in the pseudo-series, it is configured such that a case of deviation may occur. The time can be increased to about 55 seconds. Moreover, as described above, in the case where the number of times of simulated fluctuation is five, the player is expected to go through five times of simulated fluctuation since the expectation that the jackpot is achieved is the highest when reach is established. Even if completely out of the way, in the process leading up to the outset, it is possible to increase reach and become a jackpot expectation by repeating the pseudo fluctuation, and it is not bothersome to approach the outset. Therefore, it is possible to make frequent occurrence of the fluctuation display by the pseudo ream which is dislocated after 5 times of the pseudo fluctuation, and for the purpose of making the player enjoy the game without having much concern for the small number of start winnings. One average fluctuation time can be lengthened. In other words, it is possible to increase the interest in the game without causing the player to get bored, and to increase the average fluctuation time of one time by making the pseudo ream frequently occur.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the type of reach performed when reach is established after five times of pseudo fluctuation is limited to a specific type of reach such as a special reach. Therefore, when the fifth simulated fluctuation is started, the player plays a game while having an expectation that the specific kind of reach (special reach) is established by the fifth simulated fluctuation. Can. In addition, since the specific type of reach is a high-expected special reach with the highest jackpot, the expectation for the establishment of the special reach further enhances the player's feeling. Therefore, even if the player loses the player completely as a result of the fifth pseudo fluctuation, the player is made to play the game while raising interest in the game without making the player bored Can.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at least reach is established when the pseudo fluctuation ends before the pseudo fluctuation number (5 times) having the highest degree of expectation at the time of reach establishment (5 times of the pseudo fluctuation number). And, it is configured to be a big hit with a predetermined probability. As a result, in the case where the number of times of pseudo fluctuation is 3 or 4 times, even if it is out, it is always a reach, so the player is expected to be a big hit until the finalized display is made in the variable display. You can keep feeling. Thus, the player's interest can be given to the end. In addition, when reach does not hold and comes off (complete out), it is only when the number of times of pseudo fluctuation is five, so it is a case where pseudo fluctuation ends when the number of times of pseudo fluctuation is 3 or 4 Also, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of becoming a big hit with a predetermined probability, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest to be known to the pseudo group even if the number of pseudo variations is small. In addition, in the case of complete disconnection in the pseudo run, the number of times of pseudo fluctuation is always five. Therefore, even in the case of complete disconnection in the pseudo link, it is possible to maximize the player's expectation that the reach will be established and the jackpot be achieved in the process leading to the disconnection. Therefore, the player can be entertained sufficiently even if the pseudo ream is completely removed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the “role” given the number of times of the pseudo fluctuation is five times does not become the reach as the final fluctuation pattern, and not only the “role” that the complete deviation is determined but also the final fluctuation pattern As the reach and not stop, but at the same time, stop pseudo off with a symbol, but also includes the "role" that will be re-changed and the jackpot is determined, so after 5 times of the pseudo-change, complete Even if the out-of-point symbol is displayed, the player can continue to have the expectation that re-variation may be performed and the jackpot may be determined, until the determination display is made. That is, even if the game is completely dislocated in the pseudo ream, since the player can continue to give the player a sense of anticipation for the jackpot until the symbol completely disapproved is displayed, the player is given an effect by the pseudo ream. Can be entertained to the end.

  Furthermore, in the pseudo link according to the present embodiment, as described above, the first and second pseudo fluctuations do not end the fluctuation or the reach is not established. As a result, in the pseudo-link, the pseudo-variation is always performed three or more times, and therefore it is possible to extend the average fluctuation time of one time. In addition, since it is possible to suppress or avoid the fact that the pseudo ream ends in the second pseudo fluctuation and becomes out of place as in the conventional case, the player is given the impression that the pseudo ream is merely an effect of earning time. We can suppress giving. Furthermore, in the case where an effect is given with storylines in the pseudo-variation that is repeatedly performed in the pseudo-series, an effect that allows the story to be understood among the first and second pseudo-variations in which the pseudo-variation is continued. By displaying, it is possible to execute an effect that is more understandable to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 49 to 57, a pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the third symbol display device 81 determined by the display control device 114 according to the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command or the like from the main control device 110 When the effect mode of the effect in is determined, the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. And an additional data table corresponding to an effect to be displayed additionally according to another command from the audio lamp control device 113, etc., in the additional data table buffer 233e, and then in the display data table buffer 233d. Display data table set and additional data Drawing of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the additional data table set in the data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f, and image data used for the drawing The case of controlling the transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the effect of the third symbol display device 81 determined according to the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command or the like from the main control device 110 A display data table corresponding to an aspect, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table, and an additional data table corresponding to an effect to be additionally displayed according to another command from the audio lamp control device 113 or the like And one composite data table is generated and set in the composite data table buffer 251d, and drawing of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the composite data table set in the composite data table buffer 251d. And the character ROM 234 of the image data used for the drawing. To control the transfer to use video RAM236.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration in that a work RAM 251 is provided in the display control device 114 instead of the work RAM 233. Also, of the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 35A) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, demo command processing (S2509) which is one processing of command determination processing (S2402), fluctuation pattern command processing ( S2511) and continuous notice command processing (S2515), display setting processing (S2403) and comparison processing (S2710) which is one processing of the display setting processing, and normal image transfer setting which is one processing of transfer setting processing (S2405) Partial processes respectively included in the process (S3003) are different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and the display control apparatus 114 The other processes executed by the MPU 231 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment. As described above, the display control device 114 in the present embodiment is provided with a work RAM 251 in place of the work RAM 233 in the display control device 114 in the first embodiment, as also shown in FIG. The other configuration is the same as that of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The work RAM 251 is configured by a DRAM as in the work RAM 233 in the first embodiment. In the work RAM 251, a program storage area 251a, a data table storage area 251b, a simple image display flag 251c, a composite data table buffer 251d, a pointer 251g, a drawing list area 251h, a clock counter 251i, a stored image determination flag 251j, a drawing target At least a buffer flag 251k is provided. Among these, the program storage area 251a, the data table storage area 251b, the simple image display flag 251c, the pointer 251g, the drawing list area 251h, the clock counter 251i, the stored image determination flag 251j, and the drawing target buffer flag 251k are respectively implemented in the first embodiment. It has the same configuration and function as program storage area 233a, data table storage area 233b, simplified image display flag 233c, pointer 233g, drawing list area 233h, clock counter 233i, stored image discrimination flag 233j, and drawing object buffer flag 233k in the embodiment. It is a thing.

  For example, similar to the data table storage area 233b in the first embodiment, the data table storage area 251b is displayed based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. In addition to the display data table (see FIG. 18) describing the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time with respect to the effect, and one of the effects based on the command from the voice lamp control device 113 The effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used in the additional data table (see FIG. 19) describing the display contents to be displayed with the passage of time and the one effect displayed by the display data table Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data is character ROM 1 7 is a region where the transfer to transfer to the normal video RAM236 data information and transfer data table defining the transfer timing (see FIG. 20) is stored. The other aspects are also the same as in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  The composite data table buffer 251 d is a composite data table corresponding to the effect mode of the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The composite data table includes a display data table corresponding to an effect mode of an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and an additional data table corresponding to an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect. It is generated by combining the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table.

  Here, the details of the combined data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the combined data table. In the composite data table, the time when an image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) is associated with an address represented by one unit, and the time indicated by the address Contents of an image for one frame to be displayed (drawing contents), and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer is to be started at the time indicated by the address. Is specified together.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50, in the combined data table, a display data table area, an additional data table area, and a transfer data table area are provided for each address. The display data table area of each address is associated with the same address as the address specified in the composite data table in the display data table corresponding to the effect mode of the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The contents (drawing contents) of the image for one frame to be displayed at the time indicated by the address are transferred as they are. For example, the display data table area of the address "0001H" of the composite data table is associated with the address "0001H" of the display data table corresponding to the effect mode of the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content to be displayed at the time indicated by the address "0001H" is transferred as it is.

  In the additional data table area of each address of the composite data table, the additional data table corresponding to the effect to be added to the effect corresponding to the display data table for transferring the drawing content to the display data table area, the composite data table The contents (drawing contents) of the image for one frame to be displayed in addition to the time indicated by the address, which is associated with the same address as the address specified in (1), is transferred as it is.

  For example, in the additional data table area of the synthetic data table address "0097H", the time indicated by the address "0097H" is associated with the address "0097H" of the additional data table corresponding to the effect to be added. The drawing content to be added is transferred as it is. Also, if Null data is defined in the combined data table address “0001H” to be transferred to the combined data table area, the null data is also used as it is in the transfer data table area of the combined data table address “0001H”. Will be posted.

  If the effect to be added to the effect corresponding to the display data table for transferring the drawing contents to the display data table area is not determined, it should be added to the synthesized data table area of all the addresses of the synthesized data table. Null data is described, which means that there is no display but does not exist.

  In the transfer data table area of each address of the combined data table, in the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for transferring the drawing contents to the display data table area, the same address as the address specified in the combined data table is associated The transfer data information of the transfer target image data for which transfer is to be started at the time indicated by the address is transcribed as it is. When null data is defined in one address of the transfer data table, which means that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address, one of the composite data table is selected. Null data is also transferred as it is in the transfer data table area of the address.

  For example, in the transfer data table area of the composite data table address "0001H", the address "0001H" of the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table to be transferred to the display data table area is associated with Transfer data information of transfer target image data for which transfer is to be started at the time indicated by 0001H is transcribed as it is. In addition, in the case where Null data is defined in the address "0097H" of the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table to be transferred to the display data table area, in the transfer data table area of the address "0097H" of the composite data table. Also, null data is transferred as it is.

  If no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for transferring the drawing contents is prepared in the display data table area, all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are resident The transfer target image is stored in the video RAM 235, meaning that transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is unnecessary. Null data is described, which means that there is no data.

  The MPU 231 causes the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect mode of an effect to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command (display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like received from the main control device 110. If it determines, the display data table corresponding to the production | presentation aspect and the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table will be extracted from the data table storage area 251b. Then, the contents (drawing contents) of the image for one frame to be displayed at the time indicated by the address specified for each address in the extracted display data table are displayed data table of the same address of the composite data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data for which transfer is to be started at the time indicated by the address specified for each address in the extracted transfer data table while being transferred to the area, the transfer data information of the same address of the composite data table By posting in the transfer data table area, a composite data table is generated by combining the display data table and the transfer data table. Then, the generated combined data table is set in the combined data table buffer 251 d.

  At this time, the effect to be additionally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has not been determined, so when generating this composite data table, Null data is added to the additional data table area of all addresses. Write it down. Further, when the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for transferring the drawing contents is not prepared in the display data table area of the composite data table, as described above, the transfer data table area of all the addresses of the composite data table The composite data table is generated by writing null data which means that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer to.

  Then, the MPU 231 is a command different from the command for which the effect mode of the effect to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 (in this embodiment, continuous When an effect to be added to the effect to be executed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the advance notice command), an additional data table corresponding to the effect to be added is extracted from the data table storage area 251b The contents (drawing contents) of the image for one frame to be displayed in addition to the time indicated by the address specified for each address in the extracted additional data table are set in the composite data table buffer 251 d Post by overwrite to the additional data table area of the same address of the combined data table. As a result, the rendering content of the effect to be added is added to the additional data table area of the combined data table generated earlier by the display data table and the transfer data table.

  Further, when the MPU 231 sets the generated combined data table in the combined data table buffer 251 d, it initializes the pointer 251 g. Then, the pointer 251g is incremented by one each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, and from the combined data table stored in the combined data table buffer 251d, the display data table area and the additional data table area of the address indicated by the pointer 251g. The image data to be drawn next is specified on the basis of the drawing contents defined in the above, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite specified in the transfer data table area of that address and at which point transfer should start To create a drawing list (see FIG. 21). By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image and instructs to transfer the image data. When null data is defined in the transfer data table area of the address indicated by the pointer 251g, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the transfer list does not include transfer data information. , The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237.

  Thus, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table and the additional data table according to the update of the pointer 251g, and therefore, the image as defined by the display data table and the additional data table is the third symbol display device Displayed at 81. Also, according to the update of the pointer 251g, processing is performed to transfer the image data of a predetermined sprite from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a provided in the normal video RAM 236 at a predetermined time.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, a program to be executed by the MPU 231 in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command or continuous notice command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table and the additional data table used to generate the composite data table, instead of changing.

  Here, if a program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the display control device 114 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, it becomes complicated as the effect images become more diversified. In addition, the processing of the display control device 114 is limited, which may limit the diversification of the effect images that can be controlled, because the processing of the display control device 114 is limited because a large load is imposed on the processing of the activation and execution of the enormously expanding program. . On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table and the additional data table used to generate the composite data table. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, and a composite data table is generated from the display data table according to the presentation mode of the presentation to be displayed, and according to the composite data table generated, The drawing list can be created one frame at a time because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. is there. On the other hand, in the game machine etc. except the game machine such as the pachinko machine 10, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents can not be predicted, and therefore, as described above A display data table corresponding to each effect mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a composite data table is generated from the display data table according to the presentation mode of the presentation to be displayed, and this is set in the composite data table buffer 251 d. The configuration in which the drawing list is created frame by frame in accordance with the set composite data table is an effect presentation mode in which the pachinko machine 10 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. Can be realized for the first time on the basis of the configuration of determining.

  Further, when the MPU 231 is added to the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and displays another effect, it is defined in the additional data table corresponding to the other effect to be displayed additionally. Since the drawing content is added to the additional data table buffer area of the combined data table set in the combined data table buffer 251 d, the effect can be easily added to the base effect mode and displayed. Thus, for example, when there are 32 types of original effect images and 5 types of other effect images to be displayed additionally, temporarily displaying an image in which another effect image is defined for each original effect image. If a data table is prepared separately, 32 × (1 + 5) = 192 kinds of display data tables must be prepared, but like the pachinko machine 10, data tables corresponding to other effect images are used as additional data tables. By separately defining, 32 + 5 = 37 types of displays and additional data tables may be prepared, and the capacity increase of the data table storage area 251b can be suppressed. Therefore, a data table corresponding to various presentation modes can be stored in the capacity prepared in the data table storage area 251b, and it is possible to easily achieve further diversification of presentation images.

  In addition, like the pachinko machine 10, when the other effects to be additionally displayed are defined as an additional data table, and the display of the other effects to be additionally displayed is determined, the original effect mode is supported. Since the drawing contents defined in the additional data table corresponding to the other effects are added to the combined data table generated by the display data table and the transfer data table, the combined data set in the combined data table buffer 251 d There is no need to recreate the table from scratch. Therefore, the other effect image to be displayed additionally can be easily added to the original effect image and displayed.

  In the transfer data table, as described above in the first embodiment, before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image for the normal video RAM 236 Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address so as to be stored in area 236a, image data is transferred in accordance with transfer data information defined in the transfer data table area of the composite data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table area of the composite data table by transferring from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite is drawn. , Be sure to store the image It can be allowed to store in 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table area of the composite data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 easily and reliably.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 corresponds to the display data table in accordance with the extraction of the display data table from the data table storage area 251b in accordance with the command from the audio lamp control device 113, etc. The transfer data table to be transferred is extracted from the data table storage area 251b, and a composite data table is generated by combining the extracted display data table and transfer data table, so that the transfer timing of the transfer target image data can be easily grasped. Can be controlled. Therefore, sprite image data used for drawing an image performed according to the display data table area of the composite data table can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined such that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite, so in the transfer data table area of the composite data table. Also, the transfer data information is defined such that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The additional data table and the transfer data table have the same data structure as the display data table, and in the additional data table, they are added to the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address specified in the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Therefore, the composite data table can be easily generated.

  Also, a display data table area, an additional data table area, and a transfer data table area are provided for each address of the composite data table, and the time indicated by the address by the display data table area and the additional data table area of each address The contents of the drawing to be displayed are defined, and the transfer data table area of each address defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the area, specifying and instructing the timing of the transfer start based on the transfer data table area to ensure that the image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 Can. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, since it is possible to specify the rendering content of the rendering mode originally determined from one composite data table, the rendering content of the rendering added later, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, the display data Compared with the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified from the table, the additional data table and the transfer data table, respectively, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

  Next, various types of processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing demo command processing (S2509) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114. The demo command process is a process executed in the command determination process (S2402) which is one process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B) as described above in the first embodiment, and the voice lamp is When a demo command is received from the control device 113, processing corresponding to the demo command is executed.

  In the demonstration command processing in the second embodiment, first, the drawing contents defined at each address of the demonstration display data table are transferred to the display data table area provided at the same address of the composite data table, respectively, and The combined data table is generated by writing null data in the additional data table area and the transfer data table area of all the addresses of the data table (S 3621). Then, the generated combined data table is set in the combined data table buffer 251d (S3622).

  Thereafter, the same processing as S2623 to S2625 in the demonstration command processing in the first embodiment is executed. That is, the time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the clock counter 251i (S2623), and the pointer 251g is initialized to 0 (S2624). Then, the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 in the on state is set to be on, and that the final display effect is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 in the on state. The finalized display flag shown is set to OFF, and the finalized display flag indicating that the finalized display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to OFF (S2625), the demo command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing this demo command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 251g initialized by the process of S2624, the pointer is output from the synthesized data table set in the synthesized data table buffer 251d by the process of S3622. A demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by extracting the drawing contents defined in the display data table area of the address shown in 251 g. In addition, since Null data is written in the additional data table area and the transfer data table area, another demonstration is not added to the demonstration presentation to be displayed, and the image data used for the demonstration presentation is a character. There is no transfer from the ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As for demonstration effects, drawing is performed using image data resident in the resident video RAM 235.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, fluctuation pattern command processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described (S2511). FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation pattern command processing. As described above in the first embodiment, the variation pattern command process is a process executed in the command determination process (S2402) which is one process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B), and is mainly performed. When the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the control device 110, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command is executed.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing in the second embodiment, first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation rendering pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command and the transfer data table corresponding to the fluctuation display pattern data table are determined. (S3631). In this process, as in the process of S2631 of the variation pattern command process in the first embodiment, a part of the command is changed due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously interpreted as a variation pattern command for display. If it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is determined. Thus, even when the variable control effect having a fluctuation time longer than the set display data table is actually instructed by main controller 110, the change control effect according to combined data table buffer 251d is ended. After that, the display setting process controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 so that the restart effect is displayed until the confirmation command (display determination command) from the main control device 110 is received. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the restart effect as a part of the fluctuation effect, and can continue to observe the fluctuation of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 without a sense of discomfort until the stop display of the third symbol is determined.

  Next, the drawing contents defined at each address of the determined variation table display data table are transferred to the display data table area provided at the same address of the combined data table, and defined at each address of the determined transfer data table. Transfer the current transfer data information to the transfer data table area provided at the same address of the combined data table, and write null data to the additional data table area of all the addresses of the combined data table, thereby combining data A table is generated (S3632). Then, the generated combined data table is set in the combined data table buffer 251d (S3633).

  Thereafter, the same processing as S2634 to S2638 of the variation pattern command processing in the first embodiment is executed. That is, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each of the fluctuation display data tables corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table determined by the processing of S3631 is turned on, and others The data table determination flag corresponding to the variable display data table is set to OFF (S2634). In the display setting process, the variation display data table used to generate the combined data table set in the combined data table buffer 251 d is referred to by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S 2634. It can be easily determined whether it corresponds to

  Then, in the display setting process, it is determined whether or not there is a contradiction between the variation pattern of the variation display data table used to generate the composite data table and the stop symbol set by the display stop type command to be received later. If there is a contradiction, as described later, the composite data table is generated using the display data table corresponding to the special variation, and is set in the composite data table buffer 251 d.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table used to generate the synthesized data table set in the synthesized data table buffer 251d by the processing of S3633, the time data representing the fluctuation time is measured. The counter 251i is set (S2635), and the pointer 251g is initialized to 0 (S2636). Then, the confirmation command flag, the demonstration display flag, and the confirmation display flag are all set to OFF (S2637), and the restart timer counter used in the display setting process is initialized to 0 (S2638), and the fluctuation pattern command is changed. End, and return to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 251g initialized in the process of S2636, from the combined data table set in the combined data table buffer 251d by the process of S3633, The drawing contents defined in the display data table area of the address indicated by the pointer 251g are extracted, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, and simultaneously indicated by the pointer 251g. The image data of the sprite necessary for drawing the transfer data information of the transfer data table area specified in the address and extracting the image specified in the display data table area is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Turn to As it will be controls the image controller 237. Since Null data is written in the additional data table area, another effect is not displayed until another effect (continuous notice effect) is added to the change effect.

  Further, in the display setting process, since the time of the fluctuation effect defined in the composite data table is clocked using the clock counter 251i in which the fluctuation time data is set in the process of S2635, the fluctuation effect in the composite data table is ended. If it is determined that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 is received, the confirmation display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the confirmation command (display If the finalization command can not be received, the setting of the display can be controlled to display the restart effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, continuous advance notice command processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described (S2515). FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the continuous advance notice command process. The continuous advance notice command process is a process executed in the command determination process (S2402) which is one process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35 (b)) as described above in the first embodiment, When the continuous notice command transmitted from the lamp control device 113 is received, the processing corresponding to the continuous notice command is executed.

  In the continuous advance notice command processing, the processes of S2651 and S2653 are the same as the processes of S2651 and S2653 of the continuous advance notice command processing in the first embodiment. Therefore, although detailed description about these processes is omitted, in the continuous notice command process in the second embodiment, first, a new continuous process of notifying the transfer setting process (S2405) that the continuous notice command has been processed in the ON state If the advance notice command flag is set to ON (S2651), then it is set to the continuous advance notice image type (one of “foam”, “tamago”, “chicken”, “chicken” and “chicken group”) indicated by the continuous notice command. The corresponding continuous notice additional data table is determined, and the determined continuous notice additional data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the drawing contents specified in each address of the read continuous notice additional data table are read out. Are each set in the combined data table buffer 251d. Appending the additional data table area provided in the same address of the table (S3652).

  Thereby, in the display setting process, the effect corresponding to the display data table transferred to the display data table area provided in each address of the synthesized data table set in the synthesized data table buffer 251d is processed by the process of S3652. Then, in the third symbol display device 81, the subsequent notice effect corresponding to the additional data table for successive notice added to the additional data table area provided at each address of the composite data table is additionally displayed. Identify the display content of the image for one frame.

  Thereafter, among the continuous advance notice determination flags provided for each continuous advance notice image type, the continuous advance notice determination flag corresponding to the continuous advance notice image type included in the continuous advance notice command is turned on, and the continuation corresponding to other continuous advance notice image types The advance notice determination flag is set to off (S2653), and the continuous advance notice command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the transfer setting process, when it is detected that the new continuous notice command flag set in the process of S2651 is turned on, it is assumed that a predetermined continuous notice additional data table is added to the composite data table buffer 251d by the continuous notice command process. A determination is made, and a continuous notice type corresponding to the continuous notice additional data table added to the composite data table buffer 251d is specified from the continuous notice determination flag set by the process of S2653. Then, it instructs the image controller 237 to transfer image data necessary to display the specified successive notice type.

  Next, the display setting process (S2403) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55. 54 and 55 are flowcharts showing the display setting process. The display setting process is a process executed in the command determination process (S2402) which is one process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B) as described above in the first embodiment, and the command determination process Based on the contents of the combined data table set in the combined data table buffer 251d by the process (S2402) etc., the third symbol display device 81 is used to specifically identify the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next is there. Further, in the display setting process, the pointer 251g is also updated.

  In the display setting process of the second embodiment, the processes of S3712, S3716, S3724, and S3731 are executed instead of the processes of S2712, S2716, S2724, and S2731 of the display setting process of the first embodiment. On the other hand, the processes of the other steps of the display setting process in the second embodiment are the same as the processes of the steps to which the same reference numerals of the display setting process of the first embodiment are attached. Do. Hereinafter, the processing of S3712, S3716, S3724, and S3731, which is a step specific to the display setting process in the second embodiment, will be mainly described.

  In this display setting process, when the pointer update process is executed by the process of S2711 and the pointer 251g is updated, the pointer update process is updated from the combined data table set in the combined data table buffer 251d. The drawing contents defined in the display data table area and the additional data table area of the address indicated by the pointer 251g are expanded (S3712). In the task processing, together with the reserved image expanded in the process of S2704 and the warning image expanded in the process of S2706, sprites (display objects) forming an image based on the drawn contents expanded in the process of S3712. In addition to specifying the type of the image, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle, are determined for each sprite. If null data is described in the additional data table area, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there is no sprite to be added.

  In the subsequent processing of S2713, as in the first embodiment, the value of the clock counter g is decremented by 1, and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 251i after subtraction is 0 or less (S2714), and clocked. If the value of the counter 251i is 0 or less (S2714: Yes), the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table used for generating the combined data table set in the combined data table buffer 251d has elapsed Means At this time, when the variation display data table is used to generate the composite data table, the confirmation command (display determination command from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 114 is made according to the end of the effect. Is to be transmitted, so in the subsequent processing of S2715, it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation command flag is on (S2715).

  As a result, if the determination command flag is on (S2715: Yes), this means that the determination command (display determination command) has been received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 114, so the determination is made first The drawing contents defined at each address of the display data table are respectively transferred to the display data table area provided at the same address of the combined data table, and the combined data table area and the transfer data table of all the addresses of the combined data table By writing Null data in the area, a combined data table is generated, and the generated combined data table is set in the combined data table buffer 251d (S3716). Then, the process shifts to the process of S2717.

  Thereby, when the composite data table generated from the display data table for variation is set in the composite data table buffer 251d, etc., the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 according to the end of the effect. When a determination command (a determination command for display) is received, the drawing content can be set such that the determination display effect of the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the fixed display effect simply by changing the display data table to be transferred to the display data table area of the composite data table to the fixed display data table. it can. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 281 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  If it is determined in the process of S2715 that the determined command flag is not on but off (S2715: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2722 shown in FIG. It is determined whether the finalized display flag is on (S2722). Then, if the finalized display flag is on (S2722: Yes), the result of the determination in the process of S2714 (S2714: Yes) means that the finalized display effect has ended, so the finalized display flag is set to off After (S2723), drawing contents specified at each address of the display data table for demonstration are transferred to the display data table area provided at the same address of the combined data table, and addition of all addresses of the combined data table is performed. By writing null data in the data table area and the transfer data table area, a combined data table is generated, and the generated combined data table is set in the combined data table buffer 251d (S3724). Then, the process proceeds to step S2725.

  As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display demonstration effect command indicating the start of the demonstration effect is not received by the time the finalized display effect ends, automatically, The drawing contents can be set so that the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, in the process of S2722, if the finalized display flag is not on but is off (S2722: No), then it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag indicating that demonstration is underway in the on state is on. (S2728). As a result, when the demonstration display flag is not on and is off (S2728: No), the result of the determination in the process of S2714 (S2714: Yes) means that the fluctuation effect has ended. Therefore, when the confirmation command is not received even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the fluctuation production, the combined data generated based on the display data table for fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation production to start the restart effect 1 is added to the restart timer counter initialized to 0 according to the table being set in the composite data table buffer 251d (S2729), and the value of the restart timer counter after addition becomes a predetermined value, It is determined whether or not (S2730).

  If the restart timer counter has a predetermined value (S2730: Yes), the display data table area is provided with the drawing contents defined at each address of the restart display data table at the same address of the composite data table. The combined data table is generated by writing null data in the additional data table area and transfer data table area of all addresses of the combined data table, and the created combined data table is set in the combined data table buffer 251d. (S3731). Then, the process proceeds to step S2732.

  Thereby, in the display control device, the confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 even if a predetermined time has passed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed along with the end of the fluctuation effect When the display confirmation command is not received, the drawing content can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as described above, since the restart effect is an effect of displaying the image in which the third symbol is vibrated on the third symbol display device 81, the player can display the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. When it is visually recognized that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped and displayed, it can be recognized that the stopped symbol is not determined at that time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the comparison processing (S2710) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the comparison process. This process is a process that is executed when it is determined that the comparison flag is on (S2709: Yes) in the display setting process (FIGS. 54 and 56) described above, and based on the display variation pattern command. If the display data table for variation used to generate the composite data table set in the composite data table buffer 251d contradicts the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command, the change is In order to change the effect into a special change effect that changes and displays the third symbol at high speed until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 is received. Processing.

  As described above in the first embodiment, the display data table for variation is prepared for each variation pattern, and each variation pattern is used for outliers, 15R fixed jackpot, hourly big jackpot sharing, 15R probability variable jackpot, There are 2R probability variation jackpots and so on. Therefore, for example, although the display data table for variation corresponds to the variation pattern for removal, when the stop symbol is set to the big hit symbol, it is determined that these are contradictory in the comparison process. .

  In the comparison process of the second embodiment, the process of S3784 is executed instead of the process of S2784 of the display setting process of the first embodiment. On the other hand, the processes of the other steps of the display setting process in the second embodiment are the same as the processes of the steps to which the same reference numerals of the display setting process of the first embodiment are attached. I omit it. Hereinafter, the processing of S3784 which is a step unique to the display setting processing in the second embodiment will be mainly described.

  In this comparison process, it is determined whether or not the type of the display data table for variation specified in the process of S2781 matches the stop symbol specified in the process of S2782 (S2783), and they are not matched. In the case (S2783: No), the drawing contents defined at each address of the special variation display data table are transferred to the display data table area provided at the same address of the combined data table, and all of the combined data table is The combined data table is generated by writing null data in the additional data table area and the transfer data table area of the above address, and the generated combined data table is set in the combined data table buffer 251d (S3784). Then, the process proceeds to step S2785.

  As a result, based on the display variation pattern command, the variation display data table used to generate the combined data table set in the combined data table buffer 251 d and the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command In the case of contradiction, since the composite data table is generated from the display data table for special variation and set in the composite data table buffer 251d, the third symbol continues to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol display device 81 Special variation effects are displayed. Then, as the special stop symbol is set as the stop symbol by the processing of S2785, when the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 is received. The special stop symbol can be displayed on the third symbol display 281.

  Here, when the fluctuation effect pattern instructed by the main controller 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 does not match the stop symbol to be displayed at the time of the stop display of the fluctuation effect, the main control device in the display control device 114 There is a possibility that it is not possible to correctly reflect the result of the lottery performed at 110 and to perform the fluctuation effect or the fixed display effect. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, in such a case, special variation effects are performed, and after the variation display, a special stop symbol indicating a special detachment is finalized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so the main control device Even if the result of the lottery at 110 is out, it is possible to prevent the final display effect of the big hit being performed on the third symbol display device 81 by mistake. In addition, even if the special stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, if the lottery result in the main control unit 110 is a big hit, the gaming state in the actual pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the special gaming state, so The player can continue playing with peace of mind. Furthermore, by setting the finalized display as a special stop symbol, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state even if the finalized display is out, Even if the finalized display is out, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state, so that the player can be prevented from feeling uneasy.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the normal image transfer setting process (S3003) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process. The normal image transfer setting process is a process executed in the transfer setting process (S2405) which is one process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B), as described above in the first embodiment, While the simplified image display flag 251c is off, the predetermined image data is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information described in the transfer data table area of the composite data table set in the composite data table buffer 251d. A transfer instruction to transfer from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 is set.

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the composite data table set in the composite data table buffer 251d, the address indicated by the pointer 251g updated by the display setting process (S2403 shown in FIG. 54) executed earlier. The information described in the transfer data table area provided in (4) is acquired (S4201), and the process proceeds to S3202. Then, in the processing of S3202 to S3218, the same processing as the processing of S3202 to S3218 of the normal image transfer setting processing in the first embodiment is performed. Therefore, detailed description of these processes is omitted.

  As described above, in the display control device 114, a combined data table as shown in FIG. 50 is generated from the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table, and is set in the combined data table buffer 251d. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to transfer data described in the transfer data table area provided in the address indicated by the pointer 251 g of the combined data table set in the combined data table buffer 251 d. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image to the image controller 237 is set according to the information, the image data of the sprite specified in the display data table area of the composite data table buffer 251d is surely from the character ROM 234 at the desired timing. It can be transferred to the RAM 236.

  Here, as in the first embodiment, the transfer data is transferred so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the table, since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area according to transfer data information defined in the transfer data table area of the composite data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table area of the composite data table by transferring to 236a, the image data not always resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite must be the image storage area 236a. Can be stored inThen, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table area of the composite data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 easily and reliably.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined such that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite, so in the transfer data table area of the composite data table. Also, the transfer data information is defined such that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the command (display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command or the like received from the main control device 110 Accordingly, when the effect mode of the effect to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 is determined, the display data table corresponding to the effect mode and the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table are extracted from the data table storage area 251b. Do. Then, the contents (drawing contents) of the image for one frame to be displayed at the time indicated by the address specified for each address in the extracted display data table are displayed data table of the same address of the composite data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data for which transfer is to be started at the time indicated by the address specified for each address in the extracted transfer data table while being transferred to the area, the transfer data information of the same address of the composite data table By posting in the transfer data table area, a composite data table is generated by combining the display data table and the transfer data table. Then, the generated combined data table is set in the combined data table buffer 251 d.

  In addition, if an effect to be added to the effect to be executed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to another command (for example, a continuous advance notice command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, the addition is The additional data table corresponding to the effect to be extracted is extracted from the data table storage area 251b, and in the extracted additional data table, for one frame to be displayed in addition to the time indicated by the address specified for each address The contents (drawing contents) of the image are transferred by overwriting in the additional data table area of the same address of the combined data table set in the combined data table buffer 251 d. As a result, the rendering content of the effect to be added is added to the additional data table area of the combined data table generated earlier by the display data table and the transfer data table.

  On the other hand, when the generated combined data table is set in the combined data table buffer 251d, the pointer 251g is initialized. Then, 451 g is added by one each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, and then the combined data table stored in the combined data table buffer 251 d is displayed in the display data table area and the additional data table area of the address indicated by the pointer 251 g. While specifying the image content to be drawn next based on the specified drawing content, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be started to be transferred at that time is specified in the transfer data table area of the address. It specifies and creates a drawing list (see FIG. 21). Then, by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image and to transfer the image data.

  Thus, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table and the additional data table according to the update of the pointer 251g, and therefore, the image as defined by the display data table and the additional data table is the third symbol display device Displayed at 81. Also, according to the update of the pointer 251g, processing is performed to transfer the image data of a predetermined sprite from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a provided in the normal video RAM 236 at a predetermined time.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, a program to be executed by the MPU 231 in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command or continuous notice command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table and the additional data table used to generate the composite data table, instead of changing.

  Here, if a program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the display control device 114 is changed as in a conventional slot machine, it is complicated with the diversification of effect images. In addition, the processing of the display control device 114 is limited, which may limit the diversification of the effect images that can be controlled, because the processing of the display control device 114 is limited because a large load is imposed on the processing of the activation and execution of the enormously expanding program. . On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table and the additional data table used to generate the composite data table. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, and a composite data table is generated from the display data table according to the presentation mode of the presentation to be displayed, and according to the composite data table generated, The drawing list can be created one frame at a time because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. is there. On the other hand, in the game machine etc. except the game machine such as the pachinko machine 10, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents can not be predicted, and therefore, as described above A display data table corresponding to each effect mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a composite data table is generated from the display data table according to the presentation mode of the presentation to be displayed, and this is set in the composite data table buffer 251 d. The configuration in which the drawing list is created frame by frame in accordance with the set composite data table is an effect presentation mode in which the pachinko machine 10 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. Can be realized for the first time on the basis of the configuration of determining.

  Also, a display data table area, an additional data table area, and a transfer data table area are provided for each address of the composite data table, and the time indicated by the address by the display data table area and the additional data table area of each address The contents of the drawing to be displayed are defined, and the transfer data table area of each address defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the area, specifying and instructing the timing of the transfer start based on the transfer data table area to ensure that the image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 Can. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, since it is possible to specify the rendering content of the rendering mode originally determined from one composite data table, the rendering content of the rendering added later, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, the display data Compared with the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified from the table, the additional data table and the transfer data table, respectively, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment can exhibit the same function and effect as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 to 66, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, a display data table describing display contents (drawing contents) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time is used as a command from the audio lamp control device 113 or the like. An additional data table describing display contents (drawing contents) to be added to the effect mode displayed on the display data table while preparing for each effect mode of effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on that Image data that is prepared for each effect mode of effects that may be added, and that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used for display (drawing) by the display data table for each display data table Data information for transferring data from character ROM 187 to video RAM 190 for normal use and its transfer timing It has been described to prepare a transfer data table defining the grayed.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, in the display data table prepared for each effect mode of the effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 over time. Not only the display content to be displayed (drawing content) but also the display content to be added (drawing content) is defined for each effect that can be displayed additionally to the effect mode, and used for the display (drawing) The transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

  Then, when the display control device 114 determines the effect mode of the effect in the third symbol display device 81 determined according to the command (for example, the display variation pattern command) received from the sound lamp control device 113, etc. By setting the display data table corresponding to the effect mode to the display data table buffer 452d, drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d The transfer of image data used for the drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is controlled. In addition, when the effect to be displayed additionally to the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the predetermined condition, the drawing of the image to be additionally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is also controlled according to the determined effect. .

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the configuration in that a work RAM 452 is provided instead of the work RAM 233 in the display control device 114. Also, of the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 35A) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, demo command processing (S2509) which is one processing of command determination processing (S2402), fluctuation pattern command processing ( S2511) and continuous notice command processing (S2515), display setting processing (S2403) and comparison processing (S2710) which is one processing of the display setting processing, and normal image transfer setting which is one processing of transfer setting processing (S2405) Partial processes respectively included in the process (S3003) are different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and the display control apparatus 114 The other processes executed by the MPU 231 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the third embodiment. As described above, the display control device 114 in the present embodiment is provided with a work RAM 452 instead of the work RAM 233 in the display control device 114 in the first embodiment, as also shown in FIG. The other configuration is the same as that of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The work RAM 452 is configured by a DRAM, like the work RAM 233 in the first embodiment. The work RAM 452 includes a program storage area 452a, a data table storage area 452b, a simple image display flag 452c, a display data table buffer 452d, a pointer 452g, a drawing list area 452h, a clock counter 452i, a stored image determination flag 452j, a drawing object At least a buffer flag 452k is provided. Among these, the program storage area 452a, the simple image display flag 452c, the pointer 452g, the drawing list area 452h, the clock counter 452i, the stored image determination flag 452j, and the drawing target buffer flag 452k are respectively the program storage area 233a in the first embodiment. Since the simple image display flag 233c, the pointer 233g, the drawing list area 233h, the clock counter 233i, the stored image determination flag 233j, and the drawing target buffer flag 233k have the same configuration and function, the description thereof is omitted here. Do.

  The data table storage area 452b describes display contents (drawing contents) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes, and displays to be additionally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the conditions. Transfer data for defining the content (drawing content) and further transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used for the display (drawing) from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 The information and the transfer timing thereof are defined, and a display data table is stored which is prepared for each effect mode of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the sound lamp control device 113 or the like. It is an area.

  This display data table is stored together with the control program as a kind of fixed value data in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 192 after system reset is released. It is stored in the table storage area 452b. When all the display data tables are stored in the data table storage area 452b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 452b. As described above, since the work RAM 192 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even in the case where various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  Here, the details of the display data table in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the display data table. In the display data table in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which an image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit. The contents (drawing contents) of the image for one frame to be displayed at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address, and the image data of the sprite for which the transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address The transfer data information of the image data is defined together.

  As with the display data table of the first embodiment, the drawing content defines the type of sprite for each sprite (rear image, effect, character, etc.) constituting an image of one frame, and A drawing for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a display such as display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, filter specification information according to the type of the display. Information is defined.

  On the other hand, as the transfer data information, similarly to the transfer data table of the first embodiment, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Further, as transfer data information in which the image data corresponding to a predetermined sprite is the transfer target image data, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is for normal use until the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the drawing content. It is defined for a predetermined address to be stored in the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236.

  When there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address, it means that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address as transfer data information. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address “0097H” in FIG. 59). Further, when all the image data of sprites used in the effects defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, Null data is defined as transfer data information in all addresses.

  Further, in the display data table in the third embodiment, for each effect that can be additionally displayed with respect to the effect mode corresponding to the display data table, an image for one frame to be displayed in addition to the time indicated by each address The contents (drawing contents) of are defined as additional drawing contents. The additional drawing content is shown by the address in association with identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the effect that can be additionally displayed for each address. Defines the type of sprites (effects, characters, etc.) that constitute an image to be additionally displayed in the specified time, and in association with the type of each sprite, display position coordinates of the sprite, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a display such as a semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information is defined (for example, an address “0097H”). In each of the effects that can be additionally displayed, when there is no image for one frame to be additionally displayed in the time indicated by the address, identification of the effect that there is no image to be additionally displayed for that address. The information and the additional drawing contents of the effect are not described. This can suppress an increase in capacity associated with one display data table.

  As in the display data table (see FIG. 18) in the first embodiment, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H”, which is the top address of the display data table, and the last of the display data table In the address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 59), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table In addition, transfer data information of transfer target image data and additional drawing contents corresponding to effects that can be additionally displayed are described.

  When MPU 231 determines the effect mode of the effect to be displayed on third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like received from audio lamp control device 113, it extracts the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from data table storage area 452b. And stores the display data table buffer 452d and initializes the pointer 452g.

  Then, 452 g is added by one each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, and then drawing is performed next from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 452 d based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 452 g. While specifying the content of the image to be specified, transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be transferred at that time is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 21) is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image and instructs to transfer the image data. When Null data is defined in the transfer data table area of the address indicated by the pointer 452g, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the transfer list does not include transfer data information. , The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237.

  Further, when the MPU 231 determines an effect to be additionally displayed in the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like from the sound lamp control device 113, a plurality of additionally displayable effects prescribed in the display data table From among the above, additional drawing content corresponding to the determined effect is specified, and together with normal drawing content, a drawing list (see FIG. 21) is created. The MPU 231 transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 to instruct the image controller 237 to draw an image of an effect to be additionally displayed together with the image corresponding to the original effect mode.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the program to be executed by the MPU 231 is changed according to a command from the audio lamp control device 113 (for example, display variation pattern command or continuous notice command). Instead, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 452d.

  Here, if a program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the display control device 114 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, it becomes complicated as the effect images become more diversified. In addition, the processing of the display control device 114 is limited, which may limit the diversification of the effect images that can be controlled, because the processing of the display control device 114 is limited because a large load is imposed on the processing of the activation and execution of the enormously expanding program. . On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 452d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this manner, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, and a display data table according to the effect mode of effects to be displayed is set in the display data table buffer 452d, and according to the set data table The drawing list can be created frame by frame because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning combination. It is. On the other hand, in the game machine etc. except the game machine such as the pachinko machine 10, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents can not be predicted, and therefore, as described above A display data table corresponding to each effect mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, and a display data table according to the presentation mode of the presentation to be displayed is set in the display data table buffer 452d, and according to the set display data table The configuration in which the drawing list is created one frame at a time is that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the effect mode of the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. It can only be achieved on the basis of

  Further, since the additional drawing contents corresponding to all the effects that can be additionally displayed are defined in the display data table, the MPU 231 adds to the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and so on. In the case where the effect of is displayed, another effect determined easily can be added to the base effect mode and displayed without newly setting the display data table in the display data table buffer 452d.

  In addition, for example, when there are 32 types of original effect images and 5 types of other effect images to be displayed additionally, temporarily displaying an image in which one additional effect image is superimposed on each of the original effect images. If a data table is prepared separately, 32 × (1 + 5) = 192 kinds of display data tables must be prepared, but like the pachinko machine 10, additional drawing corresponding to all effects that can be additionally displayed Since the contents are defined in the display data table, 32 types of display data tables may be prepared by separately defining data tables corresponding to other effect images as additional data tables, and a data table storage area The increase in capacity of 452b can be suppressed. Therefore, a data table corresponding to various presentation modes can be stored in the capacity prepared in the data table storage area 452b, and it is possible to easily achieve further diversification of presentation images.

  In the display data table, as described above in the first embodiment, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is the image storage area of the normal video RAM 236 until the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the drawing content. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address as stored in 236a, image data is transferred from character ROM 234 to an image storage area according to the transfer data information defined in the display data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring to 236a, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite must be stored in the image storage area 236a. Can be Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by the description of the display data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display data table extracted from the data table area 452b in accordance with the command from the audio lamp control device 113 in the display control device 114, not only the drawing contents but also the transfer data of transfer target image data. Since the information and the transfer timing are defined, the transfer timing can be easily and accurately grasped and controlled. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used for drawing the image performed according to the display data table can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the display data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite, so the transfer of the image data is performed for each sprite It can be managed and controlled, and processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Further, for each address of the display data table, the drawing contents to be displayed at the time indicated by the address are defined, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to start transfer is defined. Before the sprite image data is used, the transfer start timing can be specified and instructed based on the transfer data table area so that the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, since drawing contents, transfer data information and additional drawing contents can be specified from one display data table, drawing contents, additional drawing contents and transfer data information can be respectively obtained from the display data table, additional data table and transfer data table. The processing load required for the identification can be reduced compared to the case where the identification is performed. Furthermore, since the display data table in which the drawing content, the additional drawing content, and the transfer data information are defined is prepared in advance in the data table storage area 452b, the data table defining the drawing content and the data defining the additional drawing content A table and a data table defining transfer data information are prepared, and each time the respective data tables are combined, and processing is compared with the case where drawing contents and transfer data information are specified from the combined data table. The load on can be further reduced.

  Referring back to FIG. 58, the description of the work RAM 452 is continued. The display data table buffer 452 d is a buffer for storing a display data table corresponding to an effect mode of an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command from the audio lamp control device 113 or the like. The MPU 231 determines an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the audio lamp control device 113, and selects a display data table corresponding to the effect mode of the effect from the data table storage area 452b. Then, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 452d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 452g to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 452d while adding the pointer 452g one by one to the transfer data information of the drawing content and transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 452g. Based on this, a drawing list (see FIG. 21) is created in which the contents of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data for which transfer is to be started at that time are described for each frame.

  Further, when the MPU 231 determines an effect to be displayed additionally to the effect mode of the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 determined in advance based on the command from the sound lamp control device 113 or the like. Among the additional drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 452g in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 452d, the additional drawing contents corresponding to the determined additional display to be displayed are also included. The above-mentioned drawing list (see FIG. 21) is created.

  The work RAM 452 is additionally provided with an additional data flag. The additional data flag is provided corresponding to all the effects that can be added to the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the additional data flag in the on state exists, the additional data flag is turned on. The effect corresponding to the additional data flag of the state is set as an effect to be additionally displayed. The additional data flag is set to off as an initial value, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the additional data flag corresponding to the effect to be additionally displayed is set to on. Ru. Then, when the additional display of the effect is ended, all the additional data flags are set to OFF.

  Next, various types of processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing demo command processing (S2509) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114. The demo command process is a process executed in the command determination process (S2402) which is one process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B) as described above in the third embodiment, and the voice lamp When a demo command is received from the control device 113, processing corresponding to the demo command is executed.

  In this demonstration command processing, first, similarly to the demonstration command processing in the first embodiment, a demonstration display data table corresponding to demonstration effects is selected from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d. (S2621) In the third embodiment, next, all additional data flags provided in the work RAM 452 are set to OFF (S5622). Thereby, in the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, another effect is not added and is not displayed.

  Thereafter, the same processing as S2623 to S2625 in the demonstration command processing in the first embodiment is executed. That is, time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the clock counter 452i (S2623), and the pointer 452g is initialized to 0 (S2624). Then, the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 in the on state is set to be on, and that the final display effect is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 in the on state. The finalized display flag shown is set to OFF, and the finalized display flag indicating that the finalized display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to OFF (S2625), the demo command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing this demo command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 251g initialized by the process of S2624, the pointer is displayed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d by the process of S2621. A demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by extracting the drawing content defined in the display data table area of the address shown by 452 g.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, fluctuation pattern command processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described (S2511). FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation pattern command processing. As described above in the first embodiment, the variation pattern command process is a process executed in the command determination process (S2402) which is one process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B), and is mainly performed. When the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the control device 110, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command is executed.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, similarly to the variation pattern command processing in the first embodiment, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation rendering pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display The data table is read out from the data table storage area 452b and set in the display data table buffer 452d (S2631). Then, in the third embodiment, all additional data flags provided in the work RAM 452 are set to OFF (S56223). Thereby, in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, another effect is not displayed once without being added.

  Thereafter, the same processing as S2634 to S2638 of the variation pattern command processing in the first embodiment is executed. That is, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each of the fluctuation display data tables corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table determined by the processing of S2631 is turned on, and others The data table determination flag corresponding to the variable display data table is set to OFF (S2634). In the display setting process, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern corresponds to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 452 d by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S 2634. It can be judged.

  Then, in the display setting process, it is determined whether or not there is a contradiction between the variation pattern of the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d and the stop symbol set by the display stop type command received later. If there is a contradiction, as described later, the display data table corresponding to the special variation is set in the display data table buffer 452d.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d by the process of S2631, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 452i (S2635), The pointer 452g is initialized to 0 (S2636). Then, the confirmation command flag, the demonstration display flag, and the confirmation display flag are all set to OFF (S2637), and the restart timer counter used in the display setting process is initialized to 0 (S2638), and the fluctuation pattern command is changed. End, and return to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 452g initialized by the processing of S2636, the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d by the processing of S2631. The drawing contents specified in the address indicated by the pointer 452g are extracted from the second symbol display device 81, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time the transfer data specified in the address Information is extracted, and the image controller 237 is transferred so that the sprite image data necessary for drawing the image defined in the variation display data table is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in advance. Control. Note that while the additional data flag is off, the additional drawing content is ignored. Therefore, another effect is undisplayed without being added.

  Further, in the display setting process, since the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the display data table is measured using the clock counter 452i in which the fluctuation time data is set in the process of S2635, the fluctuation effect in the display data table is ended. If it is determined that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 is received, the confirmation display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the confirmation command (display If the finalization command can not be received, the setting of the display can be controlled to display the restart effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the continuous advance notice command process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described (S2515). FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the continuous advance notice command process. The continuous advance notice command process is a process executed in the command determination process (S2402) which is one process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35 (b)) as described above in the first embodiment, When the continuous notice command transmitted from the lamp control device 113 is received, the processing corresponding to the continuous notice command is executed.

  In the continuous advance notice command processing, the processes of S2651 and S2653 are the same as the processes of S2651 and S2653 of the continuous advance notice command processing in the first embodiment. Therefore, although detailed description about these processes is omitted, in the continuous notice command process in the second embodiment, first, a new continuous process of notifying the transfer setting process (S2405) that the continuous notice command has been processed in the ON state If the advance notice command flag is set to ON (S2651), then it is set to the continuous advance notice image type (one of “foam”, “tamago”, “chicken”, “chicken” and “chicken group”) indicated by the continuous notice command. The additional data flag corresponding to the effect indicated by the continuous notice image type is set to ON, and the additional data flag corresponding to other effects is displayed so that the corresponding effect is displayed additionally to the variation effect. Is set to off (S5652).

  Thereby, in the display setting process, when the additional data flag turned on exists, the additional drawing content of the effect indicated by the turned on additional data flag is expanded, and the additional drawing content is included in the drawing list . Therefore, since the image controller 237 draws the image based on the drawing list including the additional drawing content, the image of the effect indicated by the continuous notice type indicated by the turned on additional data flag is the third symbol display device Display is added to the change production on 81.

  Thereafter, among the continuous advance notice determination flags provided for each continuous advance notice image type, the continuous advance notice determination flag corresponding to the continuous advance notice image type included in the continuous advance notice command is turned on, and the continuation corresponding to other continuous advance notice image types The advance notice determination flag is set to off (S2653), and the continuous advance notice command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Next, display setting processing (S2403) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. 63 and 64 are flowcharts showing the display setting process. The display setting process is a process executed in the command determination process (S2402) which is one process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B) as described above in the first embodiment, and the command determination process Based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d by the processing (S2402) etc., the third symbol display device 81 is used to specifically identify the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next is there. In addition, in the display setting process, the pointer 452g is also updated.

  In the display setting process of the third embodiment, the processes of S5712 to S5714 are executed instead of the process of S2712 of the display setting process of the first embodiment. Further, the processing of S5716 and S5731 is executed instead of the processing of S2716 and S2731 of the display setting processing in the first embodiment. The processes of the other steps of the display setting process in the third embodiment are the same as the processes of the steps to which the same reference numerals in the display setting process of the first embodiment are attached, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted. Hereinafter, the processing of steps S5712 to S5714, S5716, and S5731, which are steps unique to the display setting process in the second embodiment, will be mainly described.

  In this display setting process, when the pointer update process is executed by the process of S2711 and the pointer 452g is updated, then the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d is updated by the pointer update process. Of the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 452g, the drawing contents excluding the additional drawing contents are expanded (S5712). Subsequently, it is determined whether the additional data flag corresponding to all the effects that can be additionally displayed is on (S5713), and if off (S5713: Yes), the process proceeds to S2713. Also, as a result of the determination in S5713, if any one additional data flag is on (S5713: No), the pointer 452g updated by the pointer update processing from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d. Among the drawing contents of the address indicated by, the additional drawing contents corresponding to the effect type indicated by the additional data flag are expanded (S5714), and the process proceeds to the processing of S2713.

  In task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S5712 together with the reserved image and warning image expanded in advance, and for each sprite It determines various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle. Also, when any one additional data flag is ON, not only the drawing contents expanded in the process of S5712, but also the additional drawing contents expanded in the process of S5714, sprites (display In addition to specifying the type of object, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite. Therefore, when any one additional data flag is turned on, the additional drawing content of the effect indicated by the turned on additional data flag is included in the drawing list, and the image controller 237 adds the additional drawing content. By drawing the image based on the drawing list including the drawing contents, the image of the effect indicated by the turned on additional data flag is added to the third symbol display device 81 and displayed.

  In the subsequent processing of S2713, as in the first embodiment, the value of the clock counter g is decremented by 1, and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 452i after subtraction is 0 or less (S2714), and clocked. If the value of the counter 452i is 0 or less (S2714: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d has elapsed. At this time, when the display data table for variation is set in the display data table buffer 452d, the confirmation command (display confirmation command from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 114 is made according to the end of the effect. Is to be transmitted, so in the subsequent processing of S2715, it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation command flag is on (S2715).

  As a result, if the determination command flag is on (S2715: Yes), this means that the determination command (display determination command) has been received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 114, and thus the determination display data The table is set in the display data table buffer 452d, and all additional data flags are set to off (S5716). Then, the process shifts to the process of S2717.

  As a result, when the display data table for variation is set in the display data table buffer 452d, etc., the final command from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 is confirmed according to the end of the effect. When the command is received, the drawing content can be set such that the final display effect of the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table buffer 452 d to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 281 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114. Further, since all the additional data flags are set to be off, in the finalized display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, another effect is not added and is not displayed.

  If it is determined in the process of S2715 that the determined command flag is not on but off (S2715: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2722 shown in FIG. It is determined whether the finalized display flag is on (S2722). Then, if the finalized display flag is not on but off (S2722: No), it is then determined whether or not the demonstration display flag indicating that demonstration is underway in the on state is on (S2728). As a result, when the demonstration display flag is not on and is off (S2728: No), the result of the determination in the process of S2714 (S2714: Yes) means that the fluctuation effect has ended. Therefore, if the confirmation command is not received even after a predetermined time has passed since the end of the fluctuation production, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation production is set in the display data table buffer 452d in order to start the restart effect. At the same time, 1 is added to the restart timer counter initialized to 0 (S2729), and it is determined whether the value of the restart timer counter after addition has reached a predetermined value (S2730).

  When the restart timer counter has a predetermined value (S2730: Yes), the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 452d, and all additional data flags are set to OFF (S5731). Then, the process proceeds to step S2732.

  Thereby, in the display control device, the confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 even if a predetermined time has passed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed along with the end of the fluctuation effect When the display confirmation command is not received, the drawing content can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as described above, since the restart effect is an effect of displaying the image in which the third symbol is vibrated on the third symbol display device 81, the player can display the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. When it is visually recognized that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped and displayed, it can be recognized that the stopped symbol is not determined at that time. In addition, since all the additional data flags are set to off, in the restart effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, another effect is not displayed and is not displayed.

  When the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 452d in the process of S2724, the additional data flag is not set off because the branch condition of S2722: Yes is determined display This is because the effect is being performed, and in this case, all the additional data flags are set to OFF by the processing of S5716. Therefore, in the process of S2724, the process of setting the additional data flag to off is omitted. Thus, the processing load on the MPU 231 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the comparison processing (S2710) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the comparison processing. This processing is processing that is executed when it is determined that the comparison flag is on (S2709: Yes) in the display setting processing described above (FIGS. 63 and 64), and based on the display variation pattern command. If the display data table for variation set in the display data table buffer 452d contradicts the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display, the variation effect is displayed via the audio lamp control device 113. This is a process for changing to a special variation effect that causes the third symbol to be variably displayed at high speed until the determination command (the determination command for display) transmitted from the main control device 110 is received.

  As described above in the first embodiment, the display data table for variation is prepared for each variation pattern, and each variation pattern is used for outliers, 15R fixed jackpot, hourly big jackpot sharing, 15R probability variable jackpot, There are 2R probability variation jackpots and so on. Therefore, for example, although the display data table for variation corresponds to the variation pattern for removal, when the stop symbol is set to the big hit symbol, it is determined that these are contradictory in the comparison process. .

  In the comparison process of the third embodiment, the process of S5784 is executed instead of the process of S2784 of the display setting process of the first embodiment. On the other hand, since the processes of the other steps of the display setting process in the third embodiment are the same as the processes of the steps to which the same reference numerals of the display setting process in the first embodiment are attached, the detailed description thereof is omitted here. Do. Hereinafter, the processing of S5784, which is a step unique to the display setting processing in the third embodiment, will be mainly described.

  In this comparison process, it is determined whether or not the type of the display data table for variation specified in the process of S2781 matches the stop symbol specified in the process of S2782 (S2783), and they are not matched. In the case (S2783: No), the special variation display data table in which the special variation is specified is set in the display data table buffer 452d, and all additional data flags are set to OFF (S5784). Then, the process proceeds to step S2785.

  Thus, when the display data table for variation set in the display data table buffer 452d is inconsistent with the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command based on the display variation pattern command, the special variation is performed. Since the display data table for the display is set in the display data table buffer 452d, the third symbol display device 81 displays a special variation effect in which the third symbol continues to fluctuate at high speed. Then, as the special stop symbol is set as the stop symbol by the processing of S2785, when the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 is received. The special stop symbol can be displayed on the third symbol display 281.

  Here, when the fluctuation effect pattern instructed by the main controller 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 does not match the stop symbol to be displayed at the time of the stop display of the fluctuation effect, the main control device in the display control device 114 There is a possibility that it is not possible to correctly reflect the result of the lottery performed at 110 and to perform the fluctuation effect or the fixed display effect. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, in such a case, special variation effects are performed, and after the variation display, a special stop symbol indicating a special detachment is finalized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so the main control device Even if the result of the lottery at 110 is out, it is possible to prevent the final display effect of the big hit being performed on the third symbol display device 81 by mistake. In addition, even if the special stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, if the lottery result in the main control unit 110 is a big hit, the gaming state in the actual pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the special gaming state, so The player can continue playing with peace of mind. Furthermore, by setting the finalized display as a special stop symbol, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state even if the finalized display is out, Even if the finalized display is out, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state, so that the player can be prevented from feeling uneasy.

  Further, since all the additional data flags are set to off, in the special variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, another effect is not displayed and is not displayed. In particular, in the special variation effect, the stop symbol may become a special stop symbol, and it is not appropriate that the continuous notice effect image is additionally displayed in order to highlight the speciality of the variation effect. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, all the additional data flags are set to off, so that at least at this time, even if addition of the continuous advance notice effect is set, the setting can be cleared and the setting is made. It is possible to prevent continuous preview effects from being displayed additionally.

  In the continuous notice command processing, the type of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d is determined, and if it is the display data table for special variation, all additional data flags are substituted instead of the processing of S5652. It may be set to off. As a result, even if continuous notice command processing is executed after setting the display data table for special variation in the display data table buffer 452d, all additional data flags are set to off, so special variation effect is generated. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the continuous notice effect from being displayed additionally.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the normal image transfer setting process (S3003) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process. The normal image transfer setting process is a process executed in the transfer setting process (S2405) which is one process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B), as described above in the first embodiment, While the simplified image display flag 452c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d. A transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set.

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452 d, the address indicated by the pointer 452 g updated by the display setting process (S 2403, see FIG. 63) executed earlier. The transfer data information described in is acquired (S6201). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired transfer data information is null data (S6202). If it is not null data (S6202: No), a character in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information is determined. The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the ROM 234 and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 452 (S3203) Further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 185 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3204), and the process proceeds to S3205.

  If the acquired transfer data information is null data in the process of S6202 (S6202: Yes), the process of S3203 and S3204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3205. Then, in the processing of S3205 to S3218, the same processing as the processing of S3205 to S3218 of the normal image transfer setting processing in the first embodiment is performed. Therefore, detailed description of these processes is omitted.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the display control device 114 follows the transfer data information described in the address indicated by the pointer 452g of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image to the image controller 237 is set, the image data of the sprite specified by the display data table buffer 452 d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. .

  Here, in the display data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a until drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, image data is transferred from character ROM 234 to image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the display data table, whereby the data is specified according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by the description of the display data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, only the drawing content is displayed in the display data table extracted from the data table area 452b in accordance with the command from the audio lamp control device 113 (for example, display fluctuation pattern command). Instead, since the transfer data information and transfer timing of the transfer target image data are defined, the transfer timing can be easily and accurately grasped and controlled. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used for drawing the image performed according to the display data table can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the display data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite, so in the transfer data table area of the composite data table. Also, the transfer data information is defined such that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Further, for each address of the display data table, the drawing contents to be displayed at the time indicated by the address are defined, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to start transfer is defined. Before the sprite image data is used, the transfer start timing can be specified and instructed based on the transfer data table area so that the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, since the drawing content and the transfer data information can be specified from one display data table, the specification is made in comparison with the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified from the display data table and the transfer data table, respectively. Can reduce the processing load required for Furthermore, since a display data table in which drawing contents and transfer data information are specified is prepared in advance in data table storage area 452b, a data table specifying drawing contents, a data table specifying additional drawing contents, and transfer The processing load is further compared with the case where a data table defining data information is prepared, each data table is synthesized, and the drawing content and transfer data information are specified from the synthesized data table. It can be lightened.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, in the display data table prepared for each effect mode of the effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the third one occurs over time. Not only display contents (drawing contents) to be displayed on the symbol display device 81 but also image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used for the display (drawing) from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 Transfer data information to be transferred to the device and its transfer timing are defined. Furthermore, in the display data table, additional rendering contents corresponding to the effects that can be additionally displayed are defined for the effect mode of the effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table.

  When the display control device 114 determines the effect mode of the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display data table corresponding to the effect mode is stored in the data table storage area While extracting from 452b and storing in the display data table buffer 452d, the pointer 452g is initialized. Then, 452 g is added by one each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, and then drawing is performed next from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 452 d based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 452 g. While specifying the content of the image to be specified, transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be transferred at that time is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 21) is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image and instructs to transfer the image data. When Null data is defined in the transfer data table area of the address indicated by the pointer 452g, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the transfer list does not include transfer data information. , The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237.

  Further, when the display control device 114 determines an effect to be additionally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command from the sound lamp control device 113, etc., a plurality of additional display specified in the display data table is possible Among the effects, the additional drawing content corresponding to the determined effect is specified, and together with the normal drawing content, the drawing list (see FIG. 21) is created. The MPU 231 transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 to instruct the image controller 237 to draw an image of an effect to be additionally displayed together with the image corresponding to the original effect mode.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the program to be executed by the MPU 231 is changed according to a command from the audio lamp control device 113 (for example, display variation pattern command or continuous notice command). Instead, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 452d.

  Here, if a program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the display control device 114 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, it becomes complicated as the effect images become more diversified. In addition, the processing of the display control device 114 is limited, which may limit the diversification of the effect images that can be controlled, because the processing of the display control device 114 is limited because a large load is imposed on the processing of the activation and execution of the enormously expanding program. . On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 452d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this manner, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, and a display data table according to the effect mode of effects to be displayed is set in the display data table buffer 452d, and according to the set data table The drawing list can be created frame by frame because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning combination. It is. On the other hand, in the game machine etc. except the game machine such as the pachinko machine 10, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents can not be predicted, and therefore, as described above A display data table corresponding to each effect mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, and a display data table according to the presentation mode of the presentation to be displayed is set in the display data table buffer 452d, and according to the set display data table The configuration in which the drawing list is created one frame at a time is that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the effect mode of the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. It can only be achieved on the basis of

  Further, for each address of the display data table, the drawing contents to be displayed at the time indicated by the address are defined, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to start transfer is defined. Before the sprite image data is used, the transfer start timing can be specified and instructed based on the transfer data table area so that the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, since drawing contents, transfer data information and additional drawing contents can be specified from one display data table, drawing contents, additional drawing contents and transfer data information can be respectively obtained from the display data table, additional data table and transfer data table. The processing load required for the identification can be reduced compared to the case where the identification is performed. Furthermore, since the display data table in which the drawing content, the additional drawing content, and the transfer data information are defined is prepared in advance in the data table storage area 452b, the data table defining the drawing content and the data defining the additional drawing content A table and a data table defining transfer data information are prepared, and each time the respective data tables are combined, and processing is compared with the case where drawing contents and transfer data information are specified from the combined data table. The load on can be further reduced.

  In addition, the "third symbol" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "identification information" described in the claims, and the "variation display" described in the above embodiments is described in the claims. Corresponding to "dynamic display of identification information", the "big hit" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "special game state" described in the claims, and the "simulated change" described in the above embodiment is, The "reach" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "simulated dynamic display" described in the claims, and the "reach" described in the claims corresponds to the above embodiment. "Special reach" corresponds to the "specific indication" described in the claims.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  For example, in each of the above-described embodiments, the maximum number of times of pseudo-variation in the case where pseudo-training is performed, that is, the number of times of fluctuation having a high expectation for achieving the largest jackpot when reach is established It may be. For example, it may be three times, four times, or six times or more. However, if the number of times of simulated change is large, the sense of expectation for a big hit gradually increases, so while the interest of the player increases, if the number of times of simulated change is too large, the player may be bored. Therefore, it is desirable that the maximum number of times of pseudo fluctuation is 4 to 6 times.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the final fluctuation pattern is given as the final fluctuation pattern in the role given for the number of times of pseudo fluctuation of 5 times (the maximum number of pseudo fluctuation that the expectation for becoming the largest jackpot increases when reach is achieved). Although it does not reach, but at the same time, it makes a pseudo stop with a disappointing symbol, but after that, it includes the role of performing re-variation and determining the jackpot. However, this role is not necessarily required, and it is a final reach of a special reach as a change pattern, and a role of determining that it will be a jackpot, a role of not reaching a reach as a final change pattern, and a complete out of Should be included. With these roles, even if multiple pseudo-repetitive fluctuation displays are made after passing 5 times of pseudo fluctuation, it is expected that reach will be established and jackpot by repeating pseudo fluctuation in the process of coming out. The feeling can be enhanced, and getting close to it does not bother you. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest to the game without making the player bored, and to increase the frequency of one average fluctuation by increasing the frequency of the pseudo sequence.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case has been described in which the jackpot is always achieved when the reach is reached after the pseudo-fluctuation of five times (the maximum number of times of pseudo-variation in which the degree of expectation is highest when the reach is achieved). However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the expectation that the jackpot is achieved is increased when the reach is established as the number of times of pseudo fluctuation included in the pseudo ream increases, the pseudo fluctuation of 5 times (maximum number of pseudo fluctuation) You may reach out by passing through. Also in this case, it is possible to increase the interest to the game without making the player bored, and to increase the average time of one fluctuation by increasing the frequency of the pseudo ream.

  In addition, when configured to reach out after reaching 5 times (maximum number of times of simulated change) and becoming out of reach, in particular, the reach should be a specific type of reach such as a special reach. Is preferred. Thereby, when the fifth simulated fluctuation is started, the player plays a game while having an expectation that the specific kind of reach (special reach) is established by the fifth simulated fluctuation. be able to. In addition, when it comes to reach, it becomes the specific kind of reach (special reach), so even if the result is out of place, the player feels pleasure in having become the specific kind of reach be able to. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game without making the player bored and enhancing the interest in the game.

  In the above embodiment, the case of realizing the pseudo ream by the play by the fighting type fighting game has been described, but if the role as shown in FIG. 8 is given as the role of the pseudo ream, the mode of the rendition is which It may be like that. For example, in the case of a pachinko machine 10 having a motif of a boy who is engaged in carpenter training, the pseudo-train may be configured by the training scene. For example, in each pseudo-variation, the effect of performing carpenter training in front of the master is displayed, and at the time of pseudo-stop, an effect that causes a failure and yells at the master is displayed. Then, in the second pseudo-variation, an effect of performing training again is displayed with regret and tears, and when it is finally lost, an effect of being expelled by the master is displayed, and when it is finally a big hit, Display an effect that can be admired by the master. In addition, in the case of a pachinko machine 10 having a particular singer as a motif, the pseudo-series is presented by presenting the singer's music in the ranking format in the fifth, fourth, third ... in order for each pseudo change. It may be configured. In this case, in the case of the final release, an effect of releasing the music outside the area is displayed, and in the final case of the jackpot, an effect of releasing the first song or the song of the eyeball is displayed. As described above, even if the pseudo-train is configured, if the role as shown in FIG. 8 is given in the pseudo-train, the pseudo-train can be enhanced while enhancing the interest in the game without making the player bored. It is possible to obtain the effect of being able to increase the frequency of one average fluctuation by making it frequent.

  In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether the resident video RAM 235 for transfer destination or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 for transfer destination or the normal video RAM 236.

  In this case, it is determined that the image controller 237 accesses the resident video RAM 235 (that is, it is in use) to determine whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (that is, using) the normal video RAM 236. ) May be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, the MPU 231 monitors a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235, or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 by the MPU 231, It may be checked whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or ends the access, the MPU 231 notifies the MPU 231 of the information from the image controller 237 as needed. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the drive state of the image controller 237 or a notification from the image controller 237 whether the scan is in a blank period or not. If the scan state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each video RAM 235, 236 is not in use. Thereby, only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 of the image controller 237 is confirmed, and it is judged whether or not it is not in use, so that the judgment can be made easily.

  Further, in this case, the MPU 231 selects one of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f, the combined data table set in the combined data table buffer 251d, and the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d. When transfer data information which is not null data exists at the addresses indicated by the pointers 233g, 251g, and 452g, processing of reading image data from the character ROM 234 according to the transfer data information and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 is started. You may do so. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since a predetermined address is defined, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to a display data table or the like by transferring image data according to transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, drawing of the sprite is performed. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for the above can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  The process of reading out image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process or a loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. As a result, in the MPU 231, transfer processing of image data can be executed using time during which important processing in the display control apparatus 114 such as command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing is not performed. In addition, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are processes that are executed prior to the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt process or the V interrupt process. Transfer processing can be performed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the MPU 231 does not manage the video RAMs using the addresses held by the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but shares the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 in common. In the address system used, a different address area may be allocated to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly designate the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or regular video RAM 236) to be accessed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, but merely designates the address, and The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or for the regular video RAM 236. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply designated. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the instruction for performing the specification. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as an information indicating the storage destination of the data of the sprite, without using the storage RAM type, simply using the address set in the common address system. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the construction of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above embodiments, the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected. However, the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. It may be connected directly to the controller 237. Also, a bridge circuit is provided to convert the input / output specification of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specification of the mask ROM, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. It is also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, an existing image controller 237 or an internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the premise of using a general mask ROM as a character ROM is used as it is, and a NAND flash memo 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to be able to directly access the character ROM 234.

  The above embodiments have described the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memo 234a, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a large capacity and inexpensive nonvolatile storage means such as a hard disk It may be configured. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow reading speed, but by using the display control device 114 as described in each of the above embodiments, an image can be displayed without any problem at the time when display is desired It can be done.

  In the above embodiments, the character ROM 234 is provided with the NOR ROM 234 d, and the MPU 231 stores a part of the boot program to be executed first after the system reset release in the first program storage area 234 d 1. The first program storage area is provided in a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium that can perform read operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and after MPU reset the system reset in that area A part of the boot program to be executed first may be stored. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234 d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM) or the like is provided in the character ROM 234 and a first program storage area is provided thereon. It may store part of the boot program to be executed first.

  In the above embodiments, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is sent to the buffer RAM 234c. After setting, data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is supplied from the power supply 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then, When it is detected that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated "0000H" in the ROM controller 234b, data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line You may output to MPU231 via 240). In this case, when the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H" to the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, whether the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is already set in the buffer RAM 234c, Since the character ROM 234 is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is designated by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the display main processing in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When ROM controller 234 b detects that the address designated by internal bus (bus line 240) designates a control program stored in first program storage area 234 d 1, first program storage area 234 d 1 is detected. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be directly read out from the memory and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately. In this case, the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may not be set in the buffer RAM 634c. Thus, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It may be provided directly connected to the bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. When the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video is not necessary even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not directly connectable to the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the display control device 114 is provided with one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 is described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more may be provided. Video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images according to various modes may be made resident, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by DRAMs of one port type (one input / output port) is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. A port type RAM may be used. Thus, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed simultaneously. For example, while the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn, it is read from the character ROM 234 The process of writing the processed image data into the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. One RAM is a resident area and a normal area. , And the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored. When a resident area and a normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by read or write processing by one of the resident area and the normal area. It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in each of the above embodiments is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Good. In this case, at least image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at least for residence in response to a received command received from the main control device 101 or the voice lamp control device 113 or other input from the outside. Preferably, it is resident in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiments, the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is partially transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to make it resident, but all image data stored in the character ROM 234 is sent to the resident video RAM 235 It may be transferred. In this case, since the image data stored in the nonresident character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. May be

  In each of the above embodiments, the resident video RAM 235 is described as being held without being overwritten during power on, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the main control means 101 or the audio lamp control device Based on a command received from 113, when making the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 largely different, etc., the image data to be made resident in the resident video RAM 235 is overwritten and updated based on a predetermined opportunity. It is also good. In this case, while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Also, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is kept updated in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated even when the other resident images are updated. You may leave it. In addition, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out image data to be newly resident, and the read image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. It may be transferred while not in use (ie, during a period in which image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer). Image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 according to data information), and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use (ie, while image data corresponding to the transition image is not read) You may do it.

  When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is transferred using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 It may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident and transfer the read out image data through the buffer RAM 237a. It is also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237, which has received an instruction to transfer image data to be resident from the MPU 231, accesses the character ROM 234, reads image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the content of the resident video RAM 235 while the transition image is displayed, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In each of the above embodiments, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, a RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal or not is stored at the time of power failure cancellation. In the display main processing or main processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after power on, before starting transfer of the main image data at power on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the RAM determination value is confirmed. If the RAM determination value is a normal value, this means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be normally stored, so the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. It may be configured to In this case, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be made non-execution by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even when the system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and execution of the display main process or main process is started by the MPU 231, the data of the resident video RAM 235 is stored normally. In this case, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for the power failure recovery. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, it is necessary to transfer the image data if the data of the resident video RAM 235 normally remains due to a momentary stop or the like. Since time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be displayed immediately on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Alternatively, instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured alone and connected directly to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Furthermore, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) with many data signal exchanges. Transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by

  In the above embodiments, the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a has been described as one block of the NAND flash memo 234a. However, the storage capacity is not necessarily limited to this and may be set appropriately. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a buffer period (blank period) during scanning on the blank area which is a scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed A data capacity sufficient to complete the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 may be used as the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, transfer from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 generated in this blank period. .

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the stored image data is transferred from the other buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. It may be configured. In addition, while an area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another image data is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Since processing can be performed, the time taken for the processing can be shortened.

  In each of the above embodiments, the character ROM 234 turns on the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 after powering on the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image. Although the case of transfer has been described, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power on. Thus, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the third symbol display device 81 displays the image at power-on, while using the character ROM 234. The image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Since image data is not read out from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiments, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a is the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power on fluctuation image area Although the case of transferring to 235 b has been described, reading of image data from the resident video RAM 434 is not performed while transferring image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image. Image data corresponding to the main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. . Also, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and the power-on main image and power stored in the normal video RAM 236 While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuation image, the resident video RAM 235 If the image data is not read out from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Thus, transfer of image data can be completed more quickly without intervention of the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above embodiments, when the player operates the frame button 22, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a back image change command and a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the back image change command and the frame. Although the case where the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of the super reach are changed based on the button operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 200 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, according to the change of the gaming state. A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thereby, the display control device 114 can change the back image or the effect mode of the super reach according to the game state based on the back image change command or the game state command. In addition, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 200, and change the back image or the effect mode of super reach according to the gaming state. Then, image data corresponding to at least a partial range of the rear image after the change or the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the presentation mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 From the resident area, the back image can be displayed immediately using the image data resident in the back image area 235c.

  In addition, the display control device 114 may change the rear surface image in accordance with the specifications of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the back image after the change is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. You may Here, when the image data of the back image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in the sub area, or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined such that a new back image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiments, the output signal of the vibration sensor 228 is input to the audio lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the audio lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Although the case where the warning image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and an output signal of the vibration sensor 228 is input to the main control device 110, The main controller 110 may detect a vibration error, and the main controller 110 may transmit an error command notifying the error to either the voice lamp controller 113 or the display controller 114. Then, when an error command is sent to the audio lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, and sends an error command for further notifying the display control device 114 of the error. May be

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor 228 may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of the vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is on in the display setting process (see FIG. 41). The warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately by executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 43 (b)) when it is determined. In this case, since it becomes unnecessary to transmit and receive the error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

  In each of the above embodiments, the vibration sensor 228 is attached to the back of the game board 13. However, instead of the vibration sensor 228 or together with the vibration sensor 228, the magnet sensor is the back of the game board 13. It may be attached to This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to suppress that the flow of the ball is changed by the magnetic field such as a magnet and the ball is intentionally entered into the ball entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, if it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the main controller 110 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is An error command to be transmitted may be sent from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit 114 via the audio lamp control unit 113 or directly. Also, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, if it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command that indicates an error may be transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, the image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying of the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 218 is resident in the error message image area 235 f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 313 The display control device 313 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 218 when it receives an error command from the main controller 110 or the audio lamp control device 113 to transmit the magnetic field error. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 310, the display control device 114 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 313 Alternatively, the warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 218 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. Thereby, the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113, or recognizes the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 425, an error message image for notifying a magnetic field error without delay is shown in FIG. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is not It can be suppressed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, as the additional data table and the display data table, the case is described in which the drawing content for displaying the third symbol display device 81 by adding the continuous advance notice effect that is not normally displayed in the change effect is defined. However, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the additional data table or the display data table is added to one of the effects displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 110 and the third symbol display Drawing contents for drawing various effects to be displayed on the device 81 may be defined. In addition, in the additional data table or the display data table, an image not normally displayed is additionally displayed with respect to one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 110. Instead of specifying the necessary drawing content, or in addition to specifying such drawing content, the drawing content necessary to change the color tone of a part or all of the one rendering, or The drawing content necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in the effect of may be set.

  When the drawing content required to change the color tone of a part or all of one presentation is defined by the additional data table or the display data table, in the additional data table or the display data table, 1 in the third symbol display device 81 The type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed at that time corresponding to the address in which the time for which the image for the frame is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) is represented as one unit, and the change in the sprite It may define color information specifying a color tone. Then, the MPU 231 sets the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233e, the additional data table area of the combined data table set in the combined data table buffer 251d, or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d. Display data when the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed is specified by the addresses indicated by the pointers 233g, 251g, and 452g in the additional drawing content defined in the above, and color information for specifying the color tone after the change in the sprite. The display data table area set in the table buffer 233 d, the display data table area of the combined data table set in the combined data table buffer 251 d, or the display data set in the display data table buffer 452 d The color information of the corresponding sprite type defined in the addresses indicated by the pointers 233g, 251g, and 452g in the drawing contents defined in the data table, the additional data table, the additional data table area of the combined data table, or the display data table The drawing list may be created in place of the color information defined by the additional drawing content of. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  In addition, when the drawing content necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in one of the effects is defined by the additional data table or the display data table, the third symbol display is displayed in the additional data table or the display data table. The sprite type to be replaced is newly displayed in correspondence with the address in which the time for which an image of one frame is displayed (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) is displayed as one unit in the device 81. The type of sprite to be displayed and the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed may be defined. Then, the MPU 231 sets the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233e, the additional data table area of the combined data table set in the combined data table buffer 251d, or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d. In the additional drawing content defined in, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed are specified in the addresses indicated by the pointers 233g, 251g, and 452g. If the display data table area is set to the display data table buffer 233 d, the display data table area of the combined data table set to the combined data table buffer 251 d, or the display data table buffer 4 Sprite type to be newly displayed instead of the sprite to be replaced among the various sprites defined at the addresses indicated by the pointers 233g, 251g, and 452g in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set to 2d And drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  In the first and second embodiments described above, the transfer data table is prepared corresponding to each display data table, but in addition to this, transfer for addition, which is a transfer data table corresponding to each additional data table A data table may be prepared. The additional transfer data table is used in the corresponding additional data table in correspondence with the address defined in the additional data table (or display data table), and the sprite whose transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Transfer data information of image data may be described.

  In this case, for example, in the first embodiment, when the additional transfer data table buffer is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 281 and one additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 233e, the display data table The additional transfer data table corresponding to the one additional data table may be set in the additional transfer data table buffer in addition to the transfer data table corresponding to. Then, the MPU 231 adds transfer data information to the drawing list if transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233 g in the transfer data table for addition set in the transfer data table buffer for addition. You may In the second embodiment, when the additional transfer data table area is provided in the composite data table and the composite data table is generated from the display data table and the transfer data table, null data is added to the additional transfer data table area. When the contents of the additional data table are additionally written in the additional data table area of the combined data table after writing, addition of the contents of the transfer data table for addition corresponding to the additional data table is added to the combined data table It may be additionally written in the transfer data table area. Then, if the transfer data information is described in the additional transfer data table area provided at the address indicated by the pointer 251g in the composite data table buffer set in the composite data table buffer 251d, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data. Information may be added to the drawing list.

  Thereby, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used by the additional data table to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the effect defined by the additional data table can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 easily and reliably. Further, by using the additional transfer data table corresponding to the additional data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing drawing of an image based on the additional data table. An additional data table can specify drawing of many sprites. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the second embodiment, the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table. In addition, transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data which is necessary when drawing an image according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying effects that can be additionally displayed. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines an effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates the drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. You may configure it.

  Thus, the image controller 237 can transfer image data of a sprite used in drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, effects to be additionally displayed can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 easily and reliably. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing drawing of the image based on the additional drawing content. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the first and second embodiments, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that causes the player to select the super reach, drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table. Although the case of specifying only the drawing content corresponding to the super reach selected by the player has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. An additional data table corresponding to the super reach is prepared, and the additional data table corresponding to the super reach selected by the player is set in the additional data table buffer 233e, or the content of the additional data table is synthesized data Composite data table set in table buffer 251d It may be write-once so against. In addition, drawing contents corresponding to the selected super reach may be added to the display data table. This makes it possible to easily identify the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player. Further, since it is not necessary to define drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data size of the display data table.

  In the third embodiment described above, the display data table includes the drawing content, the transfer data information, and the additional drawing content. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. And the transfer data information may be defined, and additional rendering contents of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table as in the first embodiment. In this case, an additional data table buffer is provided in the work RAM 452, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined as in the first embodiment, an additional data table corresponding to the effect is added It may be set. Further, the additional data table is defined not only for the additional drawing content but also including transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image performed according to the additional drawing content. Good. This makes it possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering, so from the additional data table and the transfer data table for addition The processing load required for the specification can be reduced as compared with the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified.

  In each of the above embodiments, the display control device 114 has described the case of preparing the display data table for each fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Prepare a display data table for each element such as “Change start”, “High speed change”, “Advance notice effect”, “Normal reach change”, “Super reach change”, and respond to the change pattern indicated in the display change pattern command After identifying the elements necessary for the fluctuation effect, the display data table corresponding to the sheet necessary for the fluctuation effect specified is combined into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern It may be generated. For "variation start", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach fluctuation", etc., a display common to the respective fluctuation patterns is often performed. Therefore, the data table can be efficiently provided by elementizing the fluctuation effect in this way and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element. In particular, in the pseudo run, as shown in FIGS. 11 to 13, commonly used in each pseudo run such as “high speed change”, “normal reach change”, “super reach change” and “special reach change” due to pseudo change. Because there are many elements that can be played, in the gaming machine in which the variable effect by the pseudo-series is performed, the effect of improving the efficiency of the data table by elementizing the variable effect and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element, It gets bigger.

  In the first embodiment described above, in the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table, the case where the drawing contents and the transfer data information are specified from the address indicated by the pointer 233g using the common pointer 233g However, for each data table, a pointer may be prepared.

  In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every display interval of an image of one frame at which the drawing processing is finished (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment). As described above, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image of one frame. Since the driving of the third symbol display device 81 is always performed so that an image of one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), a V interrupt signal is generated for each display of an image of one frame. By sending, it is possible to keep accurate without having to time its time interval.

  In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 specifies a frame buffer to which the drawn image is to be expanded based on the drawing object buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image expanded from the other frame buffer earlier. Although the case where information is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the frame in which the image controller 237 should expand the drawn image every time it receives the drawing list The buffers may be alternately selected, and the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and may be transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Also, each time the image controller 237 transmits the image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer to which the drawn image should be expanded. The frame buffer to be used may be switched.

  In each of the above embodiments, after the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect is set in the display data table buffers 233d and 452d, or the combined data table generated based on the finalized display data table is the combined data table After being set in the buffer 251d, the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) and the demonstration command (display demo command) from the main control unit 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 until the finalized display effect is finished. If none of the above is received, the case is described where the demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, but this is again determined using the decision display data table corresponding to the decision display effect Display data table buffer 233d, 452 Or set may be synthesized data table generated based on the determined display data table to set the composite data table buffer 251d. Also, in this case, until the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, the finalized display effect is Every time, the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect is re-set in the display data table buffer 233d, or the combined data table generated based on the finalized display data table is set in the combined data table buffer 251d. You may do so. Thus, the finalized display effect can be continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the variation pattern command or the demonstration command is received from the main control device 110.

  In each of the above embodiments, the demonstration effect has been described in the case where the rear image is changed and the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed. The present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the third symbol including the main symbol with numbers or the main symbol without numbers may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. In addition, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. In addition, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third pattern or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In the above embodiments, in the display control means 314, first, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image after power on from the character ROM 234 to the power on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power The main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Although the case has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control means 314 transfers only image data corresponding to the main image at power-on after power-on from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and at power-on after the transfer is completed. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier after the power is turned on, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be checked in the operation check in the player, the person in charge of the hall, or the factory at the time of manufacture. It is possible to immediately confirm that the operation has started without any problems by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b. Thereby, when the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b and the display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 after that, the display fluctuation pattern command is received. Based on the above, it is possible to display a simple variation display on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. It is desirable that the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b be performed immediately after displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on. As a result, it is possible to more quickly perform the fluctuation display by the power-on fluctuation image.

  In each of the above embodiments, the display data table, the additional data table, the transfer data table, and the composite data table correspond to the time in which 20 milliseconds are represented as one unit, and the contents of the image to be drawn at that time Or the case where information (transfer data information) of image data to be transferred at that time is defined, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and it is possible to define display contents at predetermined time intervals. Just do it. The predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 seconds.

  Further, in the display data table and the additional data table, as the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals, image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored instead of instructing the sprite type itself. The address of the character ROM 234 may be defined. In the display control device 114, the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored I manage the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. There is no need to manage both the information specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiments, the stored image determination flags 233j, 251j, and 452j are provided in the work RAMs 233, 251, and 452 of the display control device 114, and the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. Although the case of storing whether or not it has been described has been described, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAMs 233, 251, 452. In this case, when instructing transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, 251, 452, It is determined whether or not predetermined image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, 251, 452, and image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a where the image is stored may be deleted.

  In the above embodiments, when transferring image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is the normal video based on the stored image determination flags 233j, 251j, 452j. It is determined whether or not it is stored in the RAM 437, and if the video data for the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236, a case will be described where the MPU 231 performs a process for not performing the transfer process. However, the image controller 237 may perform this process. In this case, in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, flags equivalent to the stored image determination flags 233j, 251j, 452j are prepared, and the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. You may memorize whether you Also, the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in a work RAM provided in the image controller 237. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in this case, the MPU 231 sends an image to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. Alternatively, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where only image data corresponding to “rear surface A” among the plurality of rear surface images is made to reside in the rear surface image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 is described. Image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be made to reside in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the back image used in some super reach may be made to reside in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, transfer processing of image data from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed by making the back image of super reach expected to have a high or high frequency of occurrence resident in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. Can be suppressed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the transfer data table or the display data table defines transfer instructions of image data in association with the addresses indicated by the pointers 233g, 251g, and 452g, and the MPU 231 determines a predetermined value specified by the display pointer. Although the case where the image controller 237 is controlled to transfer the image data instructed by the transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at time has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. In the display data table, the information on the required sprite type is described, and based on the information described at the top of the display data table, the MPU 231 generates necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. It may control the image controller 237 to transfer. Alternatively, based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the type of sprite to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of that image type is The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer data to the video RAM 236.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the back surface C that is the back image of the “island stage”, the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time has been described. It is also good. In addition, not only images that scroll with time or changes in color tone as back images, but instead of such back images, an object (for example, a person) that appears over time It may be moving or changing.

  Although said each embodiment demonstrated the case where continuous advance notice production was also performed by the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in which a fluctuation production is performed, it is not necessarily restricted to this and the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in the pachinko machine 10 A separate fourth symbol display device is provided, and by making the fourth symbol display device display the fourth symbol together with the fluctuation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, a continuous advance notice effect is executed It is also good. In this case, control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, an award winning feature may be provided in the pachinko machine 10 in accordance with various effects, and the bonus item may be combined with the fluctuation effect and actuated in a predetermined mode to perform continuous advance notice effect. In addition, the continuous announcement effect may be executed by causing the audio output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 to output the sound for the continuous advance announcement effect by the control of the audio lamp control device 113, and the electric decoration portion of the pachinko machine 10 Continuous advance notice effects may be performed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the change effects.

  Thereby, every time when the fluctuation effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 (and the first symbol display device 37), the symbol is continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the prize is operated in a predetermined mode Alternatively, the player can be made to have a feeling of jackpot expectation by outputting a voice from the voice output device 226 or lighting or blinking the lighting units 29 to 33. In addition, the player usually pays attention to the third symbol display device 81 on which the variable effect is performed and continues playing the game, but the display of symbols by the fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81 The continuous advance notice effect is performed by the action of the special effects, the voice output from the voice output device 226, or the lighting / flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33, so that the effect different from the normal is performed for the player. It can be easily recognized. In addition, continuous notice effects can be easily and easily continued by simple control such as display of symbols by the fourth symbol display device, activation of characters, voice output from the voice output device 226, or lighting / flashing of the illumination parts 29 to 33. An advance notice can be made.

  In addition, if the continuous advance notice effect is performed by the voice output from the voice output device 226 or the lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the voice lamp control device 113, so The main control unit 110 causes the main control unit 110 to perform a determination of acceptance or rejection at the start of the change, causes the voice lamp control unit 113 to perform continuous advance notice effects, and causes the display control unit 114 to perform change effects. In the case of performing the advance presentation, each control device can share each processing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, so it is possible to suppress the performance required for the MPU of each control device.

  In addition, the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect in the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect in the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the character in the predetermined mode, the voice from the voice output device 226 Continuous advance notice effects may be performed by combining at least two or more of the output and lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33 and interlockingly controlling them. As a result, it is possible to execute a more diverse continuous notice effect. In addition, execution method of continuous announcement production (the indication with the 3rd symbol display 81, the indication with the 4th symbol display, the action of the special feature, the voice output from the voice output device 226, lighting or blinking of the electric decoration 29-33) Or, even by preparing a plurality of continuous notice effect modes to be selected according to the gaming state (15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, time junior high hit, disconnection) after the continuous advance notice effect is finished by changing the combination thereof. Good.

  Moreover, although said each embodiment demonstrated the case where the image for continuous notice effects other than a fluctuation production was displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, when a continuous notice effect is performed, it is not necessarily limited to this. Not being able to be done, continuous notice effect may be performed by displaying a so-called "chance", which is a combination of predetermined symbols, as a stop symbol displayed when the fluctuation effect is finished. In this case, in the continuous advance notice command processing (refer to FIG. 39A) of the command determination processing executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 313, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance is turned on and the other The stop symbol determination flag may be set to off. In the command determination process, the continuous notice command process is executed after the stop identification command process, so the chance symbol is set as a stop pattern instead of the stop symbol set by the reception of the display stop identification command, so the fluctuation stop Sometimes you can see the chance eyes fixed. Then, in the third symbol display device 81, if the chance eyes are continuously displayed as the stop symbol for each of the fluctuation effects, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a big hit will be finally obtained.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit of various counters (first random number counter C1, first per-counter type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3) Although the case where information is included in the pending ball number command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and various counters acquired at the start winning combination by another command (first random number counter C1, first per type counter C2, The information on the stop pattern selection counter C3) may be notified to the voice lamp control device 113.

  In each of the above embodiments, the main control unit 110 includes the information on the various counters (the first random number counter C1, the first random number counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3) acquired at the start winning combination in the holding ball number command. Then, the holding ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the holding ball number command according to the values of various counters included in the holding ball number command. We estimate the result of lottery that is held corresponding to the holding ball held at the time and the type of stop after the change effect, and based on the estimation result and the number of holding balls held at that time, the continuous advance presentation effect Although the case of determining whether to perform or not is described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, main controller 110 estimates the result of the lottery corresponding to the start winning or the type of stop after the fluctuation effect from the values of the various counters acquired at the time of starting winning, and at least a part of the estimation result The command may be included in the command and notified to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 may determine whether to perform continuous advance notice effects based on the notified estimation result. In addition, main control device 110 may perform continuous notice effect based on the result of the lottery corresponding to the start winning or the stop type after the fluctuation effect estimated from the values of various counters acquired at the start winning. At least the judgment result is included in the hold ball number command and notified to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 finally makes a continuous advance notice effect based on the judgment result. You may decide Furthermore, main controller 110 determines whether or not to perform continuous advance notice effects, and includes the determination result in the ball number holding ball command to notify sound lamp control unit 113, and sound lamp control unit 113 Only the presentation mode may be determined. As information included in the number-of-hold-balls command, information on the result of the lottery corresponding to the estimated start winning, information on the type of stop after the change effect, information on whether or not the continuous advance effect may be performed, or the continuous advance effect is performed By using the information as to whether or not the command is used, it is possible to reduce the command size of the holding ball number command as compared with the case where the values of various counters are included. In addition, the information on the result of the lottery corresponding to the estimated starting winning combination, the information on the stop type after the change effect, the information on whether or not the continuous advance notice effect may be performed, or the information on whether or not to perform the continuous advance effect effect It may be transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 by a command different from the holding ball number command.

  In the above embodiments, when the continuous notice command is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the display control device 114 corresponds to the continuous notice image type indicated by the continuous notice command. Although the transfer instruction has been described to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the continuous notice image type indicated by the continuous notice command constitutes a continuous notice effect of the same effect type. If the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type indicated by the continuous notice command is once transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, it is not overwritten by other image data until the continuous notice effect is finished. May be controlled. This can suppress repeated transfer of the same image data.

  When the continuous notice image type indicated by the continuous notice command constitutes a step-up type continuous notice effect, not only the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type indicated by the continuous notice command but also the step A transfer instruction may be made to transfer image data corresponding to all continuous notice image types used in up-type continuous notice effects from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Also in this case, the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is controlled so as not to be overwritten by other image data until the continuous notice effect is completed. It is also good. By this, before the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type is used by the continuous notice effect, the image data can be surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. In addition, repeated transfer of the same image data can be suppressed.

  Further, in the audio lamp control device 113, the execution of the continuous advance presentation effect is determined by the continuous advance notification determination process (S2009) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 32), and the continuous advance presentation effect mode is determined. At this stage, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the execution decision of the continuous advance notice effect and the continuous notice effect mode. Then, the display control device 114 sets a transmission instruction to transfer image data of the continuous notice image type used in the continuous notice mode from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in response to the reception of this command. It is also good. As a result, transfer of image data of the continuous notice image type used in the continuous notice mode can be started from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the start of the change effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed. Before the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type is used by the continuous notice effect, the image data can be surely stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, the display control device 114 may store the image data used for the continuous advance notice effect in the sub-area dedicated to the continuous advance notice effect image provided in the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use. As a result, it is possible to prevent the image data used in the continuous advance notice effect from being overwritten by another image data, so the image data corresponding to the desired continuous advance image type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 The probability can be increased. Thus, it is possible to suppress repeated transfer of image data used in continuous advance notice effects.

  In addition, the continuous notice command transmitted from the display control device 114 may include a signal notifying that it is the last continuous notice effect in which the change effect is set. Thus, since the display control device 114 can recognize that the display of the continuous advance notice effect is the last, while the continuous advance notice effect is being performed, it is stored in the normal video RAM 236 used for the continuous advance notice effect. When control is performed so that image data is not overwritten, cancellation of the overwrite control can be easily performed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the execution of the continuous notice effect and the continuous notice image type by the continuous notice command. It may be included in the pattern command. That is, in the variation display process (see FIG. 33) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, when generating the variation pattern command for display (S2105), it is determined whether or not to perform the continuous advance presentation effect, In the case of performing the advance notice, information on the execution and the continuous notice image type may be included in the display variation pattern command. Then, in the display control device 114, when the received display variation pattern command includes information on the execution of the continuous advance presentation effect and the continuous advance image type, the character ROM 234 of the image data corresponding to the continuous advance image type is used. In addition to instructing transfer to the normal video RAM 236, the additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice image type is set in the additional data table buffer 233e, or the additional data table and the fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command. The composite data table may be generated from the variation data table corresponding to the data and the transfer data table corresponding to the variation data table, and may be set in the composite data table buffer 251 d. In the third embodiment, when the received display variation pattern command includes information on the execution of the continuous advance presentation effect and the continuous advance image type, the additional data flag corresponding to the continuous advance image type is turned on. By setting to, the additional drawing content of the effect corresponding to the continuous notice image type may be specified from the display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command. As a result, the number of commands is reduced, and processing can be simplified.

  Further, in the first and second embodiments, when the information on the execution of the continuous notice effect and the continuous notice image type is included in the display variation pattern command, the display data table not corresponding to the continuous notice image for each variation pattern And the display data table corresponding to each continuous notice image type, and the display control device 114 displays the corresponding display data table according to the change pattern and the continuous notice image type indicated by the display change pattern command. The display data table buffer 233 d may be set. That is, the display data table may include the drawing content corresponding to the fluctuation pattern and the drawing content of the continuous notice effect corresponding to the continuous notice image type. In this case, setting of the additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice type is not necessary. Therefore, since the data table to be set can be reduced, the increase in processing load can be suppressed. In this case, the transfer instruction of the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type may be performed in accordance with the reception of the display variation pattern command. As a result, one transfer data table may be prepared for each fluctuation pattern, and therefore, an increase in data tables can be suppressed.

  In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect for which the continuous advance notice effect is performed is voice lamp control based on the stop symbol (long reach, reach other than forward or backward, complete miss reach) determined by the main controller 110. Although the case where it sets by device 113 was explained, it is not necessarily restricted to this, and when execution of a continuous advance notice production is decided by sound lamp control device 113, the stop symbol of the last change production that was put on hold If it is not a big hit, the stop symbol of the final variation effect may be replaced with the stop symbol of the reach aspect out of reach, not the stop symbol defined by the main control unit 110. As a result, the stop symbol of the last variation effect for which the continuous notice effect is performed is not the stop symbol defined by the main control unit 110, but is always an out-of-front reach, giving the player a high sense of expectation. be able to.

  In the above embodiments, when performing continuous advance notice effects along with all the change effects that have been suspended, each change effect is performed in an effect mode based on a lottery result performed at the start of each change. In this case, it may be configured to change the effect mode of change effects other than the last change effect that has been suspended to off-change effect. The variation pattern is changed according to the setting condition of the continuous advance presentation effect and the number of times of the continuous advance presentation effect executed by the processing (see S2105 in FIG. 33) of generating the display change pattern command in the audio lamp control device 113. May be In addition, when the stop symbol after the change effect is a big hit, the effect mode of the change effect is displayed based on the change pattern determined by the main control unit 110 without updating the effect mode of the change effect. May be Here, even if continuous notice effects are continuously performed, the player's sense of expectation if the situation where the jackpot does not appear as a result continues even though the mode of the corresponding change effect is, for example, the super reach change effect. There is a risk that they will move backwards, but with the continuous advance notice effect being performed continuously, the fluctuation effect other than the change effect performed last is performed finally by being performed by the fluctuation effect continuously. It is possible to give the player a higher expectation for the fluctuation effect.

  Although said each embodiment demonstrated the case where continuous advance notice production was always performed to the 3rd symbol display device 81, when execution of continuous advance notice production was determined, it is not necessarily restricted to this, for example, continuous When the frame button 22 is pressed by the player in a situation where execution of the advance notice effect is determined, continuous advance notice effect may be executed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case of displaying a high-speed variation in which all symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player can not visually recognize is displayed. In this case, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced and displayed to an extent that they can not be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white points are displayed randomly.

  In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, although the case where one first entry port 64 where the lottery of the big hit is started when the ball enters the ball is disposed in the game board 13, it is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances for which ball entry is detected independently and a jackpot lottery is started. In this case, the holding ball number command transmitted by the main control unit 110 to the sound lamp control unit 113 when there is a hold at each first entrance indicates which first entrance is the hold. Information may be included. In addition, even if the fluctuation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started, information indicating which of the first ball entry is the fluctuation effect reserved by the first ball entrance is included. Good. Thereby, in the voice lamp control device 113, a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance, and when the reserved ball number command is received, the first ball entry indicated in the reserved ball number command If you set the number of holding balls in the number of holding balls counter for the mouth and receive the fluctuation pattern command, if you decrease the number of holding balls counter for the first entrance indicated in the fluctuation pattern command by 1, the first ball entrance The number of holding balls can be counted every time.

  In addition, when a plurality of first ball entrances are provided, when the sound lamp control device 113 determines the start of the continuous advance notice effect when the ball holding ball number command is received, all the first ball entrances are performed at that time. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed over the fluctuation effect (hold ball) held by the mouth. In addition, in pachinko machines that are provided with a plurality of first ball entrances and preferentially execute the fluctuation effects reserved in one first ball entrance, the fluctuation effects are preferentially executed. The start of the continuous advance notice effect may be determined only when the ball enters the first ball entrance. As a result, since the continuous advance notice effect is not started for the fluctuation effect held at the first entrance with low priority, the continuous announcement effect for the fluctuation effect held at the first entrance with low priority It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where continuous advance notice effects are not easily finished when the fluctuation effect is continuously suspended at the first entrance with high priority.

  In the above embodiments, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the holding ball number counter 223a is decreased by 1 (see S2107 in FIG. 33). Not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the variation process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the number of holding balls of the main controller 110 subtracted according to the setting of the variation pattern command by the variation start process (S1207) The ball holding ball number command is set to transmit the value (N) of the counter 203a (see S1205 in FIG. 23) from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the ball holding ball number command has a variation pattern It may be transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 together with the transmission of the command. In this case, S2107 in FIG. 33 is omitted. In addition, when transmitting the value (N) of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110 that has been subtracted, the holding ball number command is information that means that it is the number of holding balls after subtraction (that is, the start winning combination) The ball holding ball number command may be generated without including the values of the various counters acquired along with the start winning combination, including the information indicating that the ball holding number is not added added along with. Since the determination as to whether or not to permit the continuous advance notice effect is performed when there is a start winning, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to hold the ball number command in the command determination process (see FIG. 32). When reception is detected, if the number of holding balls indicated by the holding ball number command is the number of holding balls after subtraction, that is, if it is not the number of holding balls added along with the starting winning combination, continuous advance notice determination processing The execution of may be skipped.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined in the voice lamp control device 113 when the ball number command for holding balls is received, the continuous advance notice effect is executed for all the fluctuation effects held at that time. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and it may be determined whether or not to perform continuous advance notice effects in each of the individual variable effects when the start of continuous advance notice effects is determined. . As a result, since the continuous advance notice effect does not appear or does not appear for each of the fluctuation effects, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the appearance of the continuous advance effect, and perform the effect that does not make the player bored. Can. In this case, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 updates the variable display process (see FIG. 33) each time it is executed, and provides a counter for determining whether to perform continuous advance notice effects in individual change effects. May be And in the fluctuation display processing, when performing continuous notice production (S2109: Yes), the value of the counter for deciding whether or not to perform continuous notice production in each fluctuation production is limited to a predetermined value, The continuous notice command may be set (S2110). Further, in this case, the number (range) of the predetermined value of the counter for setting the continuous advance notice effect execution for the corresponding fluctuation effect may be changed according to the condition. As this condition, for example, the value of the holding ball number counter 223a at the time of judging whether or not to start the continuous advance notice effect, the number of times of execution of the remaining continuous advance notice effect, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect for which judgment is performed The game state (15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, time shorts jackpot, out) after the end of the continuous advance notice effect of, or a combination of two or more of these. As a result, the probability that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined in each of the change effects is changed according to the condition, so that the player can pay attention to the appearance ratio of the continuous notice effect in each change effect. .

  In the above embodiments, each command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113, and the display control unit 114 is instructed to display from the audio lamp control unit 113. The command may be sent directly from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit 114. Further, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing output of each sound and lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the audio lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. When the voice lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, instead of the command generated by the voice lamp control device 113 such as a continuous advance notice command or an error occurrence command and notified to the display control device 114, continuous notice Various flags such as flags and error occurrence flags are generated, and based on the flags, display data table, transfer data table, additional data table and composite data table are displayed data table buffers 233d and 452d, transfer data table buffer 233f, additional data It may be set in the table buffer 233e or the composite data table buffer 251d, or various image data such as a warning image may be generated, or an instruction to transfer necessary image data may be set.

  In each of the above embodiments, the winnings to the first entrance 64 and the passage of the second entrance 67 are configured to be respectively suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of holding balls is limited to four. It may be set to three or less times, or five or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of balls in the variable display based on winning on the first entrance 64, the number of areas divided into four or a part of the third symbol display device 81 by the number of balls It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of holding balls is notified by the light emitting member You may configure it.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbols as identification information are scrolled in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The symbol may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as the longitudinal direction or L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, and, for example, one or more characters may be displayed in various ways along with the symbols or in addition to the symbols, or may be displayed in various ways. It also includes the effect display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In addition, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be shown.

  A display means for displaying identification information such as symbols, a main control means for controlling a game, and a method for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information based on a control command transmitted from the main control means A game machine comprising: control means, wherein a special game state having a predetermined game value is provided when a predetermined display result is revealed in the dynamic display of the identification information. It has a selection means for selecting a display mode of the dynamic display of the identification information to be performed by the display means from among a plurality of types of display modes to be executed in the dynamic display of the identification information when receiving a control command The display mode is a display mode in which a pseudo dynamic display is performed a predetermined number of times in the dynamic display of one identification information, and includes a plurality of display modes different in the predetermined number of times, and the selection means , Said pseudo In the display mode in which the dynamic display is performed, the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed a specific number of times is suggested display that suggests that the predetermined display result may appear. In such a case, the display mode of the dynamic display of the identification information is selected so that the degree of expectation at which the predetermined display result appears appears to be the highest, and the predetermined display is not performed. When the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed is selected when the display result different from the display result is displayed, the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed the specific number of times is selected A game machine A1 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the display mode of the dynamic display of the identification information is a display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed a predetermined number of times in the dynamic display of one of the identification information A plurality of different display modes are included. Then, as a result of the selection of the display mode by the selection means, the dynamic display of the identification information is performed by the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed a specific number of times in the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed When an indication indicating that a predetermined display result may appear in the dynamic display is displayed, the degree of expectation that the predetermined display result appears is the highest. Further, as a result of the selection of the display mode by the selection means, the dynamic display of the identification information in the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed when the display result different from the predetermined display result is displayed without performing the suggestion display Whenever display is performed, pseudo dynamic display is performed a specific number of times. As a result, the pseudo dynamic display is performed a specific number of times even if a display result different from a predetermined display result is not shown after the dynamic display of a specific number of times is performed, and a suggestion display is not performed. As a result, the suggestion display is performed, and the player can be made to have a strong sense of expectation that a predetermined display result appears. Therefore, the dynamic display of the identification information of the display mode can be frequently performed so as to perform the pseudo dynamic display for which the time relating to the dynamic display can be extended for a specific number of times. The present invention is effective in that the dynamic display time of one identification information can be extended while enhancing the interest of

  In the gaming machine A1, among the display modes in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed, the specific number of times is the number of times of the pseudo dynamic display in the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed the most. A game machine A2 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the specific number of times is the number of times of pseudo dynamic display in the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed most among the display modes in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed, Among the display modes in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed, when the dynamic display of the identification information is performed in the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed most, the display predetermined in the dynamic display When the indication indicating that the result may appear is given, the expectation that the predetermined indication result appears appears the highest. In addition, when dynamic display of identification information is performed in a display mode in which pseudo dynamic display is performed when display results different from a predetermined display result are displayed without performing suggested display, pseudo Of the display modes in which the dynamic display is performed, the display mode in which the most pseudo dynamic display is performed is selected. As a result, the dynamic display time of the identification information of one time can be further extended by making the dynamic display of the identification information of the display mode which performs the pseudo dynamic display a specific number of times frequently. is there.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the selection means selects the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed a specific number of times among the display modes in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed, the predetermined mode. Display mode of the dynamic display of the identification information so that the appearance of the predetermined display result is determined when the suggestion display indicating that the display result is likely to appear is performed A game machine A3 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are exerted. That is, as a result of the selection of the display mode by the selection means, the dynamic display of the identification information is performed by the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed a specific number of times in the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed. In the dynamic display of the identification information, when the indication indicating that the predetermined display result may appear is displayed, the appearance of the predetermined display result is determined. As a result, the pseudo dynamic display is performed a specific number of times even if a display result different from the predetermined display result appears without a suggestion display being performed after the pseudo dynamic display of a specific number of times. As a result, the suggestion display is performed, and the player can be made to have a strong sense of expectation that appearance of a predetermined display result is determined. Therefore, since the dynamic display of the identification information of the display mode can be frequently performed for the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display capable of lengthening the time relating to the dynamic display can be frequently performed, it is possible to play the game without making the player more bored. There is an effect that the dynamic display time of one identification information can be extended while enhancing the interest to the user.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the display mode for performing the pseudo dynamic display is a display mode for performing the pseudo dynamic display at least three times.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved in any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the display mode for performing pseudo dynamic display is a display mode for performing the pseudo dynamic display at least three times. Therefore, the dynamic display time of one identification information can be further extended by frequently using the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed as the display mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. It has the effect of In addition, in the case of performing presentation with some sort of storylines in the pseudo-dynamic display, the pseudo-dynamic display is performed at least three times, so that the story can be sufficiently transmitted to the player. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest can be further enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed is information changing every time the pseudo dynamic display is performed in addition to the pseudo dynamic display. A game machine A5 characterized by being displayed.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in the case where dynamic display of identification information is performed in a display mode in which pseudo dynamic display is performed in addition to the effects exerted in any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the pseudo dynamic display In addition to this, since information that changes each time the pseudo-dynamic display is performed is also displayed, the player can easily know the number of times the pseudo-dynamic display is executed by viewing the display. While being able to do that, as the information changes, it is possible to gradually increase the sense of expectation that a predetermined display result appears. Therefore, when the identification information is dynamically displayed in the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed, the player can be more easily embedded.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, in the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed, the suggestion display is performed as the number of times of the pseudo dynamic display increases. The game machine B1 selects a display mode of the dynamic display of the identification information so as to increase the possibility that the predetermined display result appears.

  According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects exhibited in any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the following effects are exerted. That is, when dynamic display of identification information is performed according to the display mode in which pseudo dynamic display is performed as a result of selection of the display mode by the selection unit, the more the number of the pseudo dynamic display, the more the suggestion When the display is performed, the possibility that the predetermined display result appears is increased. As a result, even after a specific number of times of pseudo dynamic display, the suggestion display is not performed, and even if a display result different from the predetermined display result appears, the pseudo dynamic in the process up to that The expectation that a predetermined display result appears can be gradually increased until the display is performed a specific number of times. There is an effect that it is possible to extend the dynamic display time of one identification information while extending the interest to the game without making the player bored.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5 and B1, when the selecting unit selects a display mode in which the number of times of performing the pseudo dynamic display is less than the specific number of times, the suggestion display is performed. The game machine C1 is characterized in that a display mode of the dynamic display of the identification information is selected.

  According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5 and B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the identification information of the dynamic display is performed in the display mode in which the number of times of performing the pseudo dynamic display is less than the specific number as a result of the selection of the display mode by the selection unit, the display result defined in advance appears The indication is displayed regardless of whether or not it is selected. Thereby, when identification information of dynamic display is performed in a display mode in which the number of times of performing pseudo dynamic display is less than a specific number of times, a display result different from a predetermined display result appears. However, since the suggestion display is always performed, the player continues to have the expectation that the predetermined display result appears until the display result of something appears in the dynamic display of the identification information. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to bring the player's interest to the end.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 and C1, when the selection means selects the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed the specific number of times as the display mode of the dynamic display of the identification information In the case where the suggestion display is performed by the dynamic indication of the identification information, a display mode of the dynamic indication of the identification information is selected so that a specific indication indication is performed. Machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, and C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when dynamic display of identification information is performed in a display mode in which pseudo dynamic display is performed a specific number of times as a result of selection of the display mode by the selection means, suggestion display is performed by dynamic display of the identification information If so, a specific indication is made. As a result, when the pseudo dynamic display of the specific number is started, the player is also expected to feel that the specific suggestion display is performed in the pseudo dynamic display of the specific number. You can play a game while holding it. Thus, the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced.

  In the gaming machine D1, the particular indication indication is an indication indication with the highest degree of expectation that a predetermined indication result appears in the indication indication.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the specific indication is the indication with the highest degree of expectation that the predetermined display result appears in the indication. When the pseudo dynamic display of is started, the player can further increase the expectation for the specific suggestion display to be performed by the pseudo dynamic display of the specific number of times. Thus, the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, C1, D1 and D2, when the selection means causes the predetermined display result to appear in the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic of the identification information As one of the display modes for displaying, after the pseudo dynamic display is performed a specific number of times, temporarily, a display result different from the predetermined display result is pseudo-displayed, and then identification information is again generated. A game machine E1 characterized by performing a dynamic display of and selecting a display mode for causing the predetermined display result to appear.

  According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, C1, D1, and D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when displaying a predetermined display result in the dynamic display of identification information, after pseudo dynamic display is performed a specific number of times, a display result different from the predetermined display result is artificially displayed. After that, the display mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed again and the predetermined display result is displayed is selected by the selection means as one of the display modes in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. By this, after pseudo dynamic display of a specified number of times is performed, even if a display result different from a predetermined display result appears, dynamic display of identification information is performed again and then determined in advance. The player can continue to have an expectation that the displayed result may appear until the displayed result is determined. Therefore, the player can enjoy the dynamic display of the identification information by pseudo dynamic display to the end.

  A gaming machine according to any one of gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, C1, D1, D2 and E1, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  A gaming machine F2 according to any one of gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, C1, D1, D2 and E1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

A gaming machine F3 according to any one of gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, C1, D1, D2 and E1, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, various effects images such as fluctuation effects (dynamic display of identification information) are displayed on display means such as liquid crystal display devices to improve the interest of the game. The fluctuation effect is an effect started when the ball enters the ball entrance (starting opening) (start winning combination), and, for example, three or 3 × 3 grids horizontally or vertically in the effective display area A total of nine symbols etc. are displayed, and the symbols etc. displayed are scrolled based on predetermined game conditions, and when the scroll is stopped, the stop symbols become a predetermined combination at the predetermined stop position. It is what generates a big hit when it is
As one aspect of this variational effect, there is an aspect in which a symbol is fixedly displayed after repeatedly performing pseudo symbol variation during one variation effect (for example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2010-259564). Conventionally, in this aspect, if the number of repetitions of the simulated symbol fluctuation performed during one fluctuation production is small, it will be dislocated in most cases, conversely, the larger the number of repetitions of the simulated symbol fluctuation, the larger the jackpot It is configured to have high expectations. As a result, as the pseudo symbol variation is repeatedly performed, the player is provided with an interest that increases the expectation of becoming a jackpot in stages.
In addition, as for fluctuation production where pseudo design fluctuation is done, fluctuation time becomes long by the part where the pseudo design fluctuation is repeated vis-a-vis the fluctuation production without pseudo design fluctuation. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to reduce the number of start winnings and interrupting the fluctuation effect as much as possible, even in the case of a loose game, many fluctuation effects are performed to perform pseudo symbol fluctuation with a small number of repetitions. Mean fluctuation time of
However, in the case of deviation, if many fluctuation effects that perform pseudo symbol fluctuation with a small number of repetitions are performed, most of the fluctuation effects in which the pseudo symbol fluctuation is performed are lost, and eventually the player sees It may be perceived as time earning, which may cause the player to be tired.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and the dynamic display time of one identification information is enhanced while making the player interesting without increasing the player's boredom. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can be extended for a long time.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
110 Main control unit (main control means)
113 Voice lamp control device (part of slave control means)
114 Display control device (part of slave control means)
222a Detailed variation pattern determination table (part of selection means)
223b Detailed variation pattern determination counter (part of selection means)
S2104 (part of selection means)

Claims (1)

A display means for displaying identification information such as symbols, a main control means for controlling a game, and a method for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information based on a control command transmitted from the main control means Control means, and
In a gaming machine which provides a special gaming state having a predetermined gaming value when a predetermined display result is revealed in the dynamic display of the identification information,
The slave control means
A selection unit configured to select a display mode of the dynamic display of the identification information to be performed by the display unit from among a plurality of display modes to be executed in the dynamic display of the identification information when the control command is received; Equipped
The display mode is a display mode in which a pseudo stop display is performed a predetermined number of times in the dynamic display of one identification information, and includes a plurality of display modes different in the predetermined number of times.
The display modes in which the pseudo stop display is performed are all the pseudo stop display performed twice or more.
The selection means is
The pseudo stop display is performed (n + 1) more than when a portion of the predetermined display result is displayed after performing the pseudo stop display n times (n is a natural number) and the predetermined effect display is performed. In the case where a part of the predetermined display result is displayed after performing the predetermined times and the predetermined effect display is performed, the dynamic of the identification information so that the degree of expectation that the predetermined display result appears appears higher A means for selecting a display mode of display;
A unit for selecting a display mode for performing the pseudo stop display (n + 2) times when the display result different from the predetermined display result appears after the pseudo stop display is performed;
When making the predetermined display result appear in the dynamic display of the identification information, after performing the pseudo stop display (n + 2) times, the display result different from the predetermined display result is temporarily displayed. And a means for selecting a display mode for causing the predetermined display result to appear after the occurrence.
The predetermined effect includes a plurality of effect modes having different times,
The selection means is
A game machine characterized by comprising means for determining the number of times of the pseudo stop display to be executed and an effect mode of a predetermined effect to be executed within a time corresponding to the received control command.